JP2020115961A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance a performance effect after a notice performance.SOLUTION: Based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition (e.g., derivation display of a big winning symbol), a state can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., big winning game state), and can be controlled to a first special state (e.g., shortened time state) different from the advantageous state and a second special state (e.g., probability variation state) that is more advantageous to a player than the first special state. Further, in the second special state, a notice performance (e.g., probability variation read-ahead zone performance) is executed for notifying that a state is controlled to the second special state after the advantageous state control when the state is controlled to the advantageous state. In addition, a suggestion performance (e.g., ready-to-win performance with a non-probability variation symbol as a ready-to-win symbol) that suggests the state is controlled to the first special state is executed, and the suggestion performance is executed at a high rate after the notice performance is completed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-13

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine capable of playing a game.

As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into the game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is the specific display result, the gaming state (game Therefore, there is a machine configured to give a predetermined game value to a player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) (so-called pachinko machine).

Also, after setting a predetermined number of bets on a predetermined game medium for one game, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each variable. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing, and the variable display of all variable display devices is performed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium predetermined according to the prize is paid out, and when a specific prize is generated, the game state is given a predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (the so-called slot machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine is an advantageous state for a player who can easily hit a ball, or an advantageous state for a player. That is, the right is generated and the condition for paying out the prize balls is easily established.

In the pachinko game machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information), which is started on the variable display device based on the fact that the game ball has won at the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. When it is done, "big hit" occurs. The derivation display means that the symbol (final stop symbol) is finally stopped and displayed. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win is entered. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning holes are won, the winning holes are closed. The number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). Note that the opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach the predetermined number, the special winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round. Also, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left-middle-right symbol) continue for a predetermined period of time, and stop and shake in a state of being consistent with a specific display result. It is possible that a big hit occurs before the final result is displayed, because it is moving, scaling or deforming, or multiple symbols fluctuate in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. The production performed in a state in which the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach production. Further, the reach state and the state thereof are referred to as the reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbols variably displayed on the variable display device is not the specific display result, the result is “out”, and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a gaming machine, it is possible to control to a first special state that is different from the advantageous state and a second special state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state, and is controlled to the advantageous state in the second special state. Then, there is one configured to execute a notice effect for notifying that the second special state will be controlled after the advantageous state control. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that, as a comment-based notice effect, an effect of notifying "probably changed if hit" is performed.

JP, 2014-168676, A (paragraph 0139).

However, with the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the effect after the notice effect could not be enhanced.

Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect after the notice effect.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, derivation display of a jackpot symbol). A state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically) for controlling to a first special state (for example, a time saving state) and a second special state (for example, a probability variation state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state. In particular, the CPU 103) and a notice effect for notifying that the second special state is controlled to the second special state after the advantageous state control in the second special state (for example, FIG. 8-12(B), (C) and the preliminary change prefetch zone effect shown in (B) and (C) of FIG. 8-13), a notice effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 032IWS312), and a first special state. Suggestion execution means (for example, step 032IWS8004 in the CPU 120 for production control) for executing a suggestion production (for example, reach production in which a non-probability variation pattern shown in FIG. 8-13(D) is used as a reach pattern) suggesting that the control is performed by , A part for executing a step 032IWS8007 and a variable display display effect process (step S172) by selecting a process table including a reach effect in step 032IWS8005, and the suggestion effect execution means is a suggestion effect after the notice effect is finished. Can be executed at a high rate (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in step 032IWS407, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), with a high probability to determine the execution of the reach effect with a non-probability variation reach pattern. 8-13.) Further, as an advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit) and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, 6 round big hit, normal big hit), and the first advantageous state is more advantageous than the second advantageous state at the end effect period at the end of the advantageous condition (for example, ending effect time). As an end effect selecting means for selecting a long period at a high rate (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11), and an end effect during the end effect period (for example, End effect production execution means capable of executing the ending effect (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26), and the end time effect execution means. 1 advantage It is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of end effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect effect period of the state, and a plurality of executable effects can be executed during the end effect effect period of the first advantageous state. An end-time effect reception unit (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B) that can accept the selection of the end-time effect executed by the end-time effect execution unit from among the kinds of end-time effects, from the player. .. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step S784 in FIG. 9-20, and step S784 in FIG. 9-21. The period in which the selection can be accepted may be the first half of the finish production period or the second half of the big hit round. Specifically, in the 16R jackpot, it may be a period from the reception of the 13R start command to the reception of the 16R end command. ) Is further provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect after the notice effect. Further, since the period of time controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, it is possible to reduce the gaming value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(Means 2) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a jackpot display display). A state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically) for controlling to a first special state (for example, a time saving state) and a second special state (for example, a probability variation state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state. In particular, the CPU 103) and a notice effect for notifying that the second special state is controlled to the second special state after the advantageous state control in the second special state (for example, FIG. 8-12(B), (C) and the preliminary change prefetch zone effect shown in (B) and (C) of FIG. 8-13), a notice effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 032IWS312), and a first special state. Suggestion execution means (for example, step 032IWS8004 in the CPU 120 for production control) for executing a suggestion production (for example, reach production in which a non-probability variation pattern shown in FIG. 8-13(D) is used as a reach pattern) suggesting that the control is performed by , A part for executing a step 032IWS8007 and a variable display display effect process (step S172) by selecting a process table including a reach effect in step 032IWS8005, and the suggestion effect execution means is a suggestion effect after the notice effect is finished. Can be executed at a high rate (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in step 032IWS407, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), with a high probability to determine the execution of the reach effect with a non-probability variation reach pattern. 8-13), a normal state (for example, a normal state), a special state including a first special state and a second special state, and an advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 rounds). It is possible to control at least one of a big hit, a probability variation big hit) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round big hit, normal big hit) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, and is controlled to the normal state. Sometimes it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, when it is a so-called big hit in the first hit), when it is controlled to an advantageous state when it is controlled to a special state (for example, when it is a so-called big hit of consecutive chan) The end effect selecting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, FIG. 9-10 in FIG. 9-10) selects a long period at a high rate as the end effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state. Step S366, FIG. 9-11) and end effect production execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, which is capable of executing end effect (for example, ending effect) during the end effect period. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26 ), and the end time effect executing means, during the end time effect period of the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E). From the player, the player can select an end time effect executed by the end time effect execution means from among a plurality of types of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Acceptable end effect receiving means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step S784 in FIG. 9-20, and step S784 in FIG. 9-21. ) Is further provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect after the notice effect. Further, since the period of time controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, it is possible to reduce the gaming value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(Means 3) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a big hit symbol derivation display). A state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically) for controlling to a first special state (for example, a time saving state) and a second special state (for example, a probability variation state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state. In particular, the CPU 103) and a notice effect for notifying that the second special state is controlled to the second special state after the advantageous state control in the second special state (for example, FIG. 8-12(B), (C) and the preliminary change prefetch zone effect shown in (B) and (C) of FIG. 8-13), a notice effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 032IWS312), and a first special state. Suggestion execution means (for example, step 032IWS8004 in the CPU 120 for production control) for executing a suggestion production (for example, reach production in which a non-probability variation pattern shown in FIG. 8-13(D) is used as a reach pattern) suggesting that the control is performed by , A process table including a reach effect is selected in step 032IWS8005 and step 032IWS8007 and a variable display effect process (step S172) are executed), and the suggestive effect execution means is a suggestive effect after the notice effect is finished. Can be executed at a high rate (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in step 032IWS407, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), with a high probability to determine the execution of the reach effect with a non-probability variation reach pattern. 8-13.) Further, as an advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit) and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, 6 round big hit, normal big hit) and can be controlled to at least one, the first special identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the first special identification information as special identification information (for example, special symbol) game The variable display of the second special identification information (for example, the second special symbol) that is advantageous to the person can be executed, and the information regarding the variable display of the first special identification information is the first reserved storage information (for example, the first reserved storage). The first hold storage means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM 102) that can be stored as, and the information regarding the variable display of the second special identification information are stored as the second hold storage information (for example, the second hold storage). Based on the second hold storage information, when possible second hold storage means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) and the first hold storage information and the second hold storage information are stored together. Variable display of 2 special identification information, variable display control means for executing the variable display of the first special identification information in preference to the variable display (for example, microcomputer 100 for game control, first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol) Display device 4B, see FIG. 9-4) and the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second pending storage information, as compared to the case where the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first pending storage information. In this case, an end time effect selecting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, FIG. 9-10) that selects a long period at a high rate as an end time effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state. 9) of step S366 of FIG. 9), and an end time effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, step S772 of FIG. 9-22) capable of executing the end effect (for example, ending effect) in the end effect period. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26), and the end time effect executing means generates a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) in the end time effect period of the first advantageous state. The player can select any one of the end productions that can be executed by the end production execution means from among a plurality of types of end productions that can be executed in the end production period of the first advantageous state. End effect receiving means that can be received from (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step S784 in FIG. 9-20, and step S784 in FIG. 9-21. ) Is further provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect after the notice effect. Further, since the period of time controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, it is possible to reduce the gaming value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the suggestion effect executing means suggests that a predetermined condition is satisfied as the suggestion effect after the notice effect is finished (for example, FIG. 8-13 ( It may be configured to execute a reach effect) in which the non-probability variation pattern shown in D) is used as a reach pattern. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect by the effect suggesting that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) for controlling the progress of the game, and the game control means. A production control unit (for example, CPU 120 for production control) that controls production based on information (for example, production control command) is provided, and the game control unit is a variable display capable of specifying a variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern). The pattern information (for example, variation pattern command) is output, and the effect control unit determines whether or not the variable display mode is the reach mode for one variable display pattern specified by the variable display pattern information. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to execute the reach effect setting process (step 032IWS8004)). With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute the effect.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, the state control means can control the second special state after the notice effect is finished (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 032IWS506 to S507). If it is Y in step 032IWS508, step 032IWS514 is executed (see the execution pattern of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect shown in FIG. 8-14(4)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation after the notice production is finished.

(Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to 6, when the notice effect executing means is controlled to the first special state after the notice effect is finished, a predetermined period of time elapses after the notice effect is finished. Then, the notice effect is ended so as to be controlled to the first special state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 032IWS509 to S510, and when Y in step 032IWS511, executes step 032IWS514. 8-15(6) (refer to the execution pattern of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a sense of disappointment when the first special state is controlled after the notice presentation is finished.

(Means 8) In any one of the means 1 to 7, a variable display execution means for performing a variable display (for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern) (for example, a portion for executing steps S171 to S173 in the effect control CPU 120). ), the variable display execution means can set the mode of the variable display to the reach mode even when the notice effect is ended in the variable display that is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, effect control). The CPU 120 executes steps 032IWS409 and S411 when Y in step 032IWS408 (see the execution pattern of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect shown in FIGS. 8-15 (7) and (8)). With such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions relating to gaming machines of means 9 to 20 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, there are a big hit with a long ending period and a short big hit in which an ending effect of a big hit is executed, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-7165. There was a time choice. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the advantageous big hits occur consecutively, the ending period is shortened, the interval between the big hit and the next big hit is shortened, and the speed at which the prize ball is obtained is increased. Due to this, there is a possibility that the gambling property becomes too high, and in view of this point, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

(Means 9) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big-hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and as the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a 16-round big hit). , A probability variation big hit) and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (e.g., 6 round big hit, normal big hit), game state control means (for example, for game control) Microcomputer 100), and the first advantageous state selects a longer period as the ending production period (for example, ending production time) at the end of the advantageous state at a higher rate than the second advantageous state. Selection means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11), and end time effect execution means capable of executing end time effect (for example, ending effect) during the end effect time period. (For example, the CPU 120 for effect control, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, and FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26), and the end time effect executing means is a plurality of types in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. One of the end effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) can be executed, and the end effect can be executed from among a plurality of types of end effects that can be executed in the end effect period of the first advantageous state. The end effect reception means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B. Other operation parts for setting, which can accept the selection of the end effect performed by the effect executing means from the player. The step S752A in Fig. 9-19, the step S784 in Fig. 9-20, and the step S784 in Fig. 9-21. The period during which the selection can be accepted may be the first half of the end-stage effect period or the big hit round. In the 16R big hit, specifically, it may be a period from the reception of the 13R start command to the reception of the 16R end command.).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(Means 10) It is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and after the advantageous state ends, control to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a probability variation state, a time saving state, a high base state). A possible gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), a normal state (for example, a normal state), a special state, and an advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 rounds big hit, probability variation big hit), A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of a second advantageous state (for example, 6 round big hit, normal big hit) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. The case where the advantageous state is controlled when the special state is controlled (for example, the so-called first hit big hit), rather than the advantageous state when the normal state is controlled (for example, the so-called big hit). In the case of a big hit of consecutive Chang), an end time effect selecting means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that selects a long period at a high rate as an end effect time period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state. 100, step S366 of FIG. 9-10, and FIG. 9-11), and an end time effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, FIG. 9) that can execute an end time effect (for example, ending effect) in an end time effect period. -22, step S772, FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26), and the end time effect executing means generates a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A during the end effect time period of the first advantageous state). ~Effect pattern E) can be executed, and the end effect is executed by the end effect executing means from among a plurality of types of end effects that can be executed in the end effect period of the first advantageous state. 9 to 19 may be selected by the player at the end effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting.). S752A, step S784 of FIG. 9-20, and FIG. 9-21.) are further provided.

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(Means 11) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as the special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information (for example, second) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information. Variable display of special symbols) can be executed, and it can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (eg, big hit game state), and a special state different from the advantageous state after completion of the advantageous state (eg, probability change state, time saving) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a state, a high base state, in which information regarding variable display of the first special identification information is stored as first reserved memory information (for example, first reserved memory). A possible first hold storage means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM 102) and a second hold storage information (for example, a second hold storage) that can store information regarding variable display of the second special identification information. When the second hold storage means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM 102) and the first hold storage information and the second hold storage information are both stored, the second special identification based on the second hold storage information. Variable display of information, variable display control means for executing the variable display of the first special identification information in preference to the variable display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B , FIG. 9-4), and as an advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot), and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. , A normal big hit) and a game state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to at least one of them, and a case where the game state is controlled in an advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information, In the case where the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second hold storage information, a longer period is selected as a finish period (for example, ending production time) at the end of the advantageous state at a higher rate. Performance selection means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S366 of FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11), and end-time performance execution capable of executing end-time performance (for example, ending performance) during the end-time performance period. Means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, and FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26), and the effect production ending means performs a plurality of effects during the ending effect period of the first advantageous state. End production of type (for example, production One of pattern A to effect pattern E) can be executed, and an end effect executed by the end effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end effects that can be executed in the end effect period of the first advantageous state. An end time effect reception unit (for example, an effect control CPU 120, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B) that can accept the selection of the time effect from the player. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step S784 in FIG. 9-20, and step S784 in FIG. 9-21. ) Is further provided.

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(Means 12) In any one of the means 9 to 11, a motion detecting means for detecting a motion by the player (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, step 069FS158 in FIG. 9-23). Further, the end time effect executing means, even when executing any of a plurality of types of end effect, executes in an effect mode in which the operation detecting means needs to detect the operation during the execution period (for example, All of the effect patterns A to E are effect modes in which the player's operations are accepted). According to such a configuration, since there is an intervention element by the player, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of extension.

(Means 13) In any one of the means 9 to 11, an operation detecting means for detecting an operation by the player (eg, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, step 069FS158 of FIG. 9-23). Further, the end time effect executing means executes the end time effect in one of an effect mode that requires detection of a motion by the motion detecting means and an effect mode that does not require detection during the execution period (for example, effect Any of pattern A to effect pattern E may be an effect mode in which the player's operation is not accepted). According to such a configuration, since there is an intervention element by the player, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of extension.

(Means 14) In any one of the means 9 to 13, when plural types of end effects are selected by the end effect acceptance means a predetermined number of times (for example, once or a plurality of times) , Until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, while the so-called consecutive chan is still finished), including an end time production in which acceptance of selection is disabled (for example, production pattern B is when all songs are released) Is not selectable during a continuous chan). According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(Means 15) In any one of means 9 to 13,
For a plurality of types of end-time effects, when the effect result is a specific result (for example, success), the selection is not accepted until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until so-called consecutive chan ends). Including an end effect that is disabled (for example, when the setting suggestion is performed, the effect pattern C is not selectable during continuous chanting). With such a configuration, a variety of effects can be created, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(Means 16) In the gaming machine of the means 14 or 15, a plurality of types of end-time productions are newly made to allow acceptance of selection, instead of end-time productions in which selection is not accepted. (For example, the effect pattern E is selectable when the effect pattern B or the effect pattern C is not selectable). According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(Means 17) In any one of the means 9 to 16, a plurality of kinds of end time effects are release conditions (for example, a condition that another effect pattern cannot be selected, a continuous chan is ended). Based on the fact that the (condition) is established, it includes an end time effect in which it is possible to accept the selection. It should be noted that before or during the selection period in which the selection of the end effect can be accepted is started or during the selection period, the player performs a special operation (for example, a back button operation or command input, specifically, a cross). The release condition may be established according to the operation of the keys in a predetermined order, the continuous push of the push button, the input of the password, and the like. According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(Means 18) In any one of the means 9 to 17, a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (for example, FIG. 10-1 to FIG. 12-3), and the plurality of types of end-time effects include effects that suggest setting values set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-26(H), effect pattern C). Is an effect that suggests a set value). According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(Means 19) In any one of the means 9 to 18, a plurality of types of end effects include end effects having different lengths (for example, the effect patterns A to effect patterns E have different lengths). Different), after the execution of the end production is completed so that the period from the execution of the end production by the end production execution means to the start of the next variable display is the same, The period adjustment effect is performed until the variable display of is started (for example, the ending effect period is longer than the effect patterns A to E, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the extra time). .. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to adjust the period from the start of execution of the ending effect to the start of the next variable display, and the game control can be easily executed.

(Means 20) In any one of the means 9 to the means 19, the ending effect period includes at least a first period and a second period after the first period has elapsed, and in the first period, a second period. A related effect (for example, introduction effect, explanation effect, effect mode selection effect) related to the effect to be executed is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-27, an effect which is executed after the ending effect time). An effect pattern selection period for selecting a pattern may be provided). According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a flowchart showing a start winning determination process. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is a flow chart which shows probability variation look-ahead zone production start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a probability variation look-ahead zone effect determination table. It is a flowchart showing a reach effect setting process. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a reach effect determination table. It is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process. It is a flow chart which shows probability variation look-ahead zone production end processing. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a probability variation look-ahead zone effect end determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production aspect of a probability variation look-ahead zone production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production aspect of a probability variation look-ahead zone production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution pattern of a probability variation look-ahead zone production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution pattern of a probability variation look-ahead zone production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution pattern of a probability variation look-ahead zone production. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of a special figure display result etc. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a figure which shows a fanfare time table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during big hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit opening post-process. It is a figure which shows an ending time table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a special figure hit waiting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit start processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of fanfare production execution processing. It is a timing chart showing an example of fanfare production. It is a screen transition diagram showing a flow of fanfare production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during a round. It is the flowchart which shows ending production selection 1st processing and 2nd processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of post-round processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing after the end of a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ending production execution processing. It is a screen transition diagram showing a flow of selecting the type of ending effect. It is a timing chart showing an example of an ending effect. It is a screen transition diagram showing a flow of ending production. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the ending production in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value change processing in the characteristic part 10F. 7 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process in the characteristic unit 10F. It is a flow chart which shows the game stop start processing in characteristic part 10F. It is a flow chart which shows the game stop end processing in characteristic part 10F. It is the figure which illustrates the production control command in feature section 40F. It is the flowchart which shows the production control main processing in the feature section 40F. It is a flow chart which shows sub side game stop processing in characteristic part 40F.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The change includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variation.

The special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and a special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). The special figure game and the variable display of the decorative design which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of variable displays that are suspended is also referred to as the suspended storage number. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B that are configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A is the number of LEDs that are turned on. The first reserved memory number is displayed by, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port which is always kept in a fixed open state through which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls are paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning a prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole which changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, and thus the tip of the movable wing piece. Is close to the prize winning ball device 6A, and the game ball does not enter the second starting prize hole (the second starting prize hole is also closed). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the tilted position of the movable wing piece (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a special winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening door is a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the on state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When the game balls enter the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, the winning of the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays the normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the universal figure game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves, which is the number of ordinary figure games that are pending to be executed, by the number of LEDs that have been lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in a peripheral portion of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so that it can be supplied to a ball striking device. A ball hitting plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and can be tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B which allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the operation (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol loss symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol defect". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state to be described later (starting winning occurs, In the case where the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" symbol and a big hit symbol. When a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" will occur.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of a lapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and a timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

The type of big hit is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc., described later) are prepared, and big hits are made accordingly. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state is finished, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the jackpot type.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) that shortens the average special figure variation time (period during which the special figure varies) compared to the normal state is executed. In the time saving state, by shortening the average figure change time (the period during which figure changes) compared to the normal state, and improving the probability of "per figure" in the figure game from the normal state, The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which it is likely to be a "big hit" in addition to improving the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The condition that the ending condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting etc.).

The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player, a game state other than a special state such as a time saving state, a probability change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is a "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

After the small hit game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cutting, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that “small hit” may not be provided as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (notification of the progress status of the game and excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" provided on the image display device 5, as the effects executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the first special figure game. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative pattern which is not stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of a big hit combination described later. Is an aspect in which is continuing.

Further, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) being a “big hit” (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" and the like) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" which is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and the even-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-determination variation pattern (normal pattern). After reaching the reach mode with the non-probabilistic variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is "small hit", the fixed decorative pattern (for example, "" which is a predetermined small hit combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of a part of big hit type (big hit type of big hit game state similar to small hit game state) and when "small hit" A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach lost") may be displayed as a stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss") (Also referred to as) the fixed decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the variable display is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit medium effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting medium production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state high accuracy state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling the gaming state, the small hitting gaming state, the gaming state, etc. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or a game ball passes) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), a game status (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening of big winning opening, winning of prize, number of reserved memories, game status), command for designating error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The production control CPU 120 displays the execution of production based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control for turning on/off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal, a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for receiving the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of recovery from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that power recovery has been performed or that power recovery is in progress. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After completing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start information (start Data such as the number of times of winning) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, whereby the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized. See below).

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the execution and suspension management of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure hold indicator 25C is turned on to display the number of held ordinary figure symbols.

After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the holding information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of holding memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of the starting winning prize thus set to be transmitted is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the special symbol process process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting a production control command corresponding to each process to the production control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and the big hit type when "big hit" Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". Includes processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether there is reach, etc.), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process for setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from when the special symbol starts varying. It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes the process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on that the display result is "big hit" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, in accordance with which the big hit type is, the upper limit opening period for opening the special winning opening and the upper limit number of times of round execution are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The big hit opening process is ended.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the jackpot gaming state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". After the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing is ended.

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and the probability change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the big hit ending process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the timing for ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing for opening the small hitting ends.

The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". The small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation for informing the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing ends.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register setting etc. of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in, for example, an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 may be stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the production operation using various production devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed in accordance with the production control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process processing shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes prefetching advance notice setting processing (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various types The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what is done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect display processing during variable display ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6. Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving the command designating to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Further, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production in response to receiving a command designating to end the small winning game state from the main board 11, for example. The value is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit completion production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit medium effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid production processing, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the production contents in the big hit gaming state, and executes various production controls in the big hit gaming state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not have to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus).

The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

Also, the game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, a hardware resource on the side of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like may be directly used. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 032IW)
Next, the characteristic part 032IW will be described. In the present example, the display screen of the image display device 5 is provided with a total reserved storage display section for displaying the total reserved storage number, which is the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, in a specifiable manner. Be present. Further, in the present example, when a start winning a prize to the first starting winning opening and a starting winning a prize to the second starting winning opening occur, the winning order thereof is stored (see the reserved specific area described later), It is assumed that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in the order of winning the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening.

Further, in this example, when the probability variation big hit, for example, is controlled to a big hit game state of 15 rounds, and is controlled to the probability variation state after the completion of the big hit game (note that the probability variation state is controlled to a time saving state (high base state)). May be done). Then, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. In addition, when the normal big hit (non-probability variation big hit), for example, the big hit game state of 15 rounds is controlled, and after the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to a time saving state (high base state). Then, the time saving state is maintained until the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the next big hit occurs.

Further, in the present example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) causes the variation pattern in which only the variation time is set in the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (in other words, variation in this example. The presence/absence and type of reach effect are not set in the pattern) and the variation pattern command is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 side displays the variation of the decorative pattern based on the received variation pattern command. Determines whether to execute the reach effect.

It should be noted that effects other than the reach effect such as the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect may be configured to be set in the variation pattern.

(Starting winning determination process)
FIG. 8-1 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (step S101) in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the first start opening switch 22A is in the on state (step 032IWS1201). If the first starting opening switch 22A is not on, the process proceeds to step 032IWS1221. If the first starting opening switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first reserved storage for counting the first reserved storage number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (step 032IWS1202). If the first number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step 032IWS1221.

If the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increments the value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 (step 032IWS1203), and at the same time, the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step 032IWS1204). Further, the CPU 103 sets an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (reserved specific area) for storing the winning order to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. , Data indicating “first” is set (step 032IWS1205).

In this example, when the first starting opening switch 22A is in the ON state (that is, when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening), the data indicating "first" is set and the second starting is performed. When the mouth switch 22B is turned on (that is, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening), the data indicating "second" is set. For example, the CPU 103 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first starting opening switch 22A is turned on in the reserved storage specific information storage area (reserved specific area), When the 2 start port switch 22B is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating "second". In this case, if there is no corresponding pending storage, 00(H) is set in the pending storage specifying information storage area (holding specific area). The reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 104 and the counter for generating the software random number and storing them in the storage area of the first pending storage buffer (step 032IWS1206). In the process of step 032IWS1206, a random number R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Random pattern determination random number (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the opening switch passing process (at the time of starting winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. May be. For example, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111), the game control microcomputer 100 may directly extract the value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). Good.

A storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first pending storage number is secured in the first pending storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this example, in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer, a random number R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, and a variation pattern type The judgment random number (random 2) and the fluctuation pattern judgment random number (random 3) are stored. The first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer are formed in the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning-time effect process for previously determining the variation display result and the variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected starting winning is subsequently performed (step 032IWS1207). Then, the CPU 103 controls to send the symbol designating command to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (step 032IWS1208) and also controls to send the variation category command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 032IWS1208). Step 032IWS1209). In addition, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first start prize-winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 032IWS1210), and sets the value of the summed hold storage number counter in the EXT data to produce the summed hold storage number designation command. The control to transmit to the control CPU 120 is performed (step 032IWS1211).

The symbol designating command and the variation category command are effect commands for designating the determination result of the winning determination (prefetch determination). Of these, the symbol designating command is an effect control command that indicates the result of determination of whether or not to be a big hit, whether or not to be a small hit, and the type of big hit among the determination results at winning. Further, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of the determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number in the winning determination result. ..

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state (step 032IWS1221). If the second starting opening switch 22B is not in the ON state, the processing is ended as it is. If the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved storage for counting the second reserved storage number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (step 032IWS1222). If the second number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is ended as it is.

If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increments the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (step 032IWS1223), and at the same time, the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step 032IWS1224). Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating “second” in the area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter in the pending storage specific information storage area (pending specific area) (step 032IWS1225).

Next, the CPU 103 extracts the values from the random number circuit 104 and the counter for generating the software random number, and stores them in the storage area of the second storage buffer (step 032IWS1226). In the process of step 032IWS1226, a random number R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern. A judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in advance in the saving area in the starting mouth switch passage processing (at the time of starting winning), but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. May be. For example, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111), the game control microcomputer 100 may directly extract the value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). Good.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning effect process (step 032IWS1227). Then, the CPU 103 controls to send the symbol designating command to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (step 032IWS1228), and also controls to send the variation category command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 032IWS1229). In addition, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second start winning award designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 032IWS1230), sets the value of the summed hold storage number counter in the EXT data, and effects the summed hold storage number designation command. Control to transmit to the control CPU 120 is performed (step 032IWS1231).

(Command analysis processing)
8-2 and 8-3 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 032IWS601). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 032IWS602). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 032IWS603). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern of a decorative pattern) (step 032IWS604), the effect control CPU 120 changes the received variation pattern command in the RAM 122. The data is stored in the pattern command storage area (step 032IWS605). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 032IWS606).

If the received production control command is a display result designation command (a production control command for designating whether to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, or a big hit type) (step 032IWS607), the production control CPU 120 determines that The received display result designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 032IWS608).

If the received production control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (a production control command that designates that the stop symbol of the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed) (step 032IWS609), the production control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag ( Step 032IWS610).

If the received production control command is a big hit start designation command (a production control command that specifies the start of a big hit game) (step 032IWS611), the production control CPU 120 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step 032IWS612).

If the received production control command is a big hit end designation command (a production control command that specifies the end of a big hit game) (step 032IWS613), the effect control CPU 120 sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step 032IWS614).

If the received effect control command is any of the symbol designating commands (step 032IWS615), the effect control CPU 120 sends the received symbol designating command to the vacant start winning time command storage area formed in the RAM 122. (Step 032IWS616).

In the start prize winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 8) corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total pending storage number are secured. In this example, a storage area is provided in each of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start prize winning command storage area so that a symbol designating command, a variation category command, a start winning designating command, and a total reserved storage number designating command can be stored in association with each other. Has been secured.

If the received production control command is any variation category command (step 032IWS617), the production control CPU 120 stores the received variation category command in each storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122. Stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designating command is stored out of 8 to 8 (step 032IWS618).

If the received effect control command is the first start winning award designating command (step 032IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received first start winning award designating command in each of the start winning award command storage areas formed in the RAM 122. It is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designating command and the variable category command are stored among the storage areas 1 to 8 (step 032IWS620). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 increments the hold display on the summed hold storage display unit by 1 and updates the summed hold storage number display on the summed hold storage display unit (step 032IWS621).

If the received effect control command is the second start winning award designating command (step 032IWS622), the effect control CPU 120 causes the received second start winning award designating command to be stored in each of the starting award command storage areas formed in the RAM 122. It is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designating command and the variable category command are stored among the storage areas 1 to 8 (step 032IWS623). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 increments the hold display by 1 on the summed hold storage display unit and updates the summed hold storage number display on the summed hold storage display unit (step 032IWS624).

Note that the total pending storage display unit may be configured to be able to specify whether the pending display is based on the first pending storage or the pending display based on the second pending storage. For example, in step 032IWS621, the white hold display is incremented by 1, so that it is possible to specify that the hold display based on the first hold storage is increased by 1, and in step 032IWS624, the blue hold display is incremented by 1. Thus, it is possible to display that the hold display based on the second hold storage is incremented by 1.

If the received effect control command is the total reserved memory number designating command (step 032IWS625), the effect control CPU 120 sends the received total reserved memory number designating command to each of the start prize winning command storage areas formed in the RAM 122. The latest symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the start winning award designating command are stored in the storage regions 1 to 8 (step 032IWS626). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control stores the total number of reserved storages designated by the total number of reserved storages designation command in the total number of reserved storages storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 032IWS627).

If the received effect control command is a command for specifying the addition of the number of pending storages (step 032IWS628), the CPU 120 for effect control erases the first pending display in the combined pending storage display unit and displays the remaining pending display by one. The display is changed by one by one to update the display of the total number of pending storages in the total pending storage display unit (step 032IWS629). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control subtracts 1 from the value of the total reserved memory number stored in the total reserved memory number storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 032IWS630).

If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step 032IWS631). Then, the process proceeds to step 032IWS601.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-4 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 032IWS8001). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read in step 032IWS8001 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (stop). (Symbol) is determined (step 032IWS8002). That is, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the process of step 032IWS8002, so that the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative pattern) is determined according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (pattern) is realized. When the pseudo pattern is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step 032IWS8002 that a chance eye symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo pattern. , A combination of a big hit design that does not reach and a design that is offset by one) is also determined.

It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop design of the decorative design in the decorative design display result storage area. In step 032IWS8002, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 032IWS8002, if the received display result designating command designates the probability variation big hit, the CPU 120 for effect control determines a combination of decorative symbols in which the three symbols are arranged in the same odd number as the stop symbol. If the received display result designating command designates a normal big hit (non-probability variation big hit), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are arranged in the same even number as a stop symbol. If the received display result designating command suddenly specifies a sudden variation big hit or a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols such as "135" as a stop symbol. Then, in the case of "disappearance", a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined. In addition, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the image display device 5 is the "stop symbol" of the decorative symbol.

The production control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop design is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative designs corresponding to the numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

As for the decorative design, a stop design that reminds of a big hit (a combination of designs in which the left, middle and right sides are all the same design) is called a big hit design. In addition, a stop design that reminds the user of disengagement is called a disengagement design. In addition, a pattern (in this example, an odd number pattern) that evokes that it will be a probability big jackpot is called a probability variation pattern, and a pattern (in this example, an even number symbol) that evokes that it is a regular jackpot is an uncertain variation pattern. Say.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a probability variation prefetch zone effect start process for starting the probability variation prefetch zone effect (step 032IWS8003). The "probability variation look-ahead zone effect" is an effect that is executed over the variable display once or a plurality of times based on the winning determination result (pre-reading determination result) during the probability variation state, and a big hit may occur during the effect period. For example, it is always a probable big hit (in other words, it usually does not happen). Therefore, in the present example, during the period in which the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is being executed, the probability variation does not normally end and the probability variation state does not end, and the player can be reassured that the probability variation state continues.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect setting process for setting the reach effect (step 032IWS8004).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the reach effect when executing the variation pattern and the reach effect (step 032IWS8005). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 032IWS8006).

The process table is a table in which process data that the production control CPU 120 refers to when performing control of the production device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (effect parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating the form of each variation constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern are described. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer set value is set with the change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decorative pattern in a variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. The process table is stored in the ROM 121. The process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In the process table used when performing effect control for a variation pattern involving reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. It should be noted that instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect. May be.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), an effect device (image display device 5 as effect part, effect part. The control of the game effect lamp 9 and the speakers 8L and 8R as parts for performance is executed (step 032IWS8007). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control the turning on/off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command in a one-to-one manner. However, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the change pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns to be used.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 032IWS8008). Next, the effect control CPU 120, the command at the time of starting winning stored in the first storage area (storage area 1) of the command storing area at the time of starting winning (designation command, variation category command, starting winning designation command and The total reserved memory number designation command) is deleted, and the contents of the start winning award command storage area are shifted (step 032IWS8009).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display effect process (step S172) (step 032IWS8010).

(Probability change prefetch zone production start processing)
FIG. 8-5 is a flowchart showing the probability variation prefetch zone effect starting process (step 032IWS8003). In the probability variation prefetch zone effect start processing, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the probability variation prefetch zone effect execution flag indicating that the probability variation prefetch zone effect is being executed is set (step 032IWS301). If the probability variation prefetch zone effect execution flag is set (that is, if the probability variation prefetch zone effect is already being executed), the probability variation prefetch zone effect start processing is ended.

If the probability variation prefetch zone effect in-execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the probability variation prefetch zone effect after completion flag indicating that it is the first variable display after the completion of the probability variation prefetch zone effect is set. It is confirmed (step 032IWS302). If the after-probability variation prefetch zone effect flag is set, the probability variation prefetch zone effect start process is terminated.

In this example, by executing the process of step 032IWS032, after the probability variation lookahead zone effect is finished, the probability variation lookahead zone effect is not started again at least in the first variable display, and the probability variation lookahead zone effect is ended. It is configured such that a variable display is provided at least once as a margin until the next probability variation prefetch zone effect is started.

Note that, not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, a variable display of a plurality of times (for example, twice or five times) is displayed as a margin from the end of the probability variation prefetch zone effect to the start of the next probability variation prefetch zone effect. It may be configured to be provided.

If the after-probability variation prefetch zone effect flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is in the probability variation state (step 032IWS303). Whether or not it is in the probability changing state can be determined, for example, by checking a state designation command for designating the gaming state transmitted by the gaming control microcomputer 100 and a background designation command for identifying the gaming state. .. If it is not in the probability variation state, the probability variation look-ahead zone effect start process is ended.

If it is in the probability change state, the effect control CPU 120 extracts all the symbol designating commands stored in the start winning award command storage area (step 032IWS304). Then, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the winning determination result indicated by the extracted symbol designating command is a normal jackpot (that is, whether or not there is a reserved memory for a normal jackpot). (Step 032IWS305). If there is a reserved memory that is usually a big hit, the probability variation look-ahead zone effect start processing is ended. Therefore, in the present example, the probability variation lookahead zone effect is not executed when there is a pending storage that is normally a big hit, and the probability variation is always a hit if a big hit occurs during execution of the probability variation lookahead zone effect.

In the present example, the case where the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is not uniformly started when there is a pending storage that is usually a big hit is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even when there is a reserved storage that is a normal big hit, the probability variation prefetch zone effect may be configured to be executed until the previous variable display that is the normal big hit. For example, in the case where the fourth hold storage is a hold storage that is usually a big hit, the probability variation look-ahead zone effect may be configured to be executed until the variable display based on the third hold storage is ended.

If there is no pending storage that is usually a jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a probability variation jackpot in the winning determination result indicated by the extracted symbol designating command (that is, a pending storage that is a probability variation jackpot). Whether or not there is any) (step 032IWS306).

When there is a pending storage that is a probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120 uses the probability variation prefetch zone effect determination table for probability variation jackpot as a table for determining whether or not to execute the probability variation prefetch zone effect. A lottery process based on a random number is performed to determine whether or not to execute the probability variation look-ahead zone effect (step 032IWS307). When it is decided to execute the probability variation prefetch zone effect (Y in step 032IWS308), the process proceeds to step 032IWS312.

If there is no pending storage that is a probability variation big hit (that is, if there is only a pending storage that is a failure), the effect control CPU 120 uses a failure determination table as a table for determining whether to execute the probability variation prefetch zone effect. The probability variation prefetch zone effect determination table is used to perform a lottery process based on a random number to determine whether or not to execute the probability variation prefetch zone effect (step 032IWS309). When it is decided to execute the probability variation look-ahead zone effect (so-called random probability variation look-ahead zone effect) (Y in step 032IWS310), the effect control CPU 120 sets the maximum number of executions of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect (maximum). A variation number counter for counting how many variations the number of times the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is executed is set to 5 (step 032IWS311). Then, the process proceeds to step 032IWS312.

FIG. 8-6 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the probability variation lookahead zone effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 8-6(A) shows a specific example of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect determination table for probability variation big hit used in step 032IWS307. Further, FIG. 8-6(B) shows a specific example of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect determination table for outliers used in step 032IWS309. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-6(A), when there is a pending storage that is a probability variation big hit, it is determined to execute the probability variation prefetch zone effect with a probability of 40%. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-6(B), even if there is only the reserved storage that is out of order, it is determined that the probability variation prefetch zone effect (probability variation prefetch zone effect of Gase) is executed with a probability of 5%. To be done.

In step 032IWS312, the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image (for example, a yellow display color background image) corresponding to the probability variation prefetch zone effect, and starts the probability variation prefetch zone effect. Control is performed (step 032IWS312). Then, the effect controlling CPU 120 sets the probability variation prefetch zone effect executing flag (step 032IWS313).

In this example, when the probability variation lookahead zone effect is started based on the fact that there is a pending storage that is a probability variation jackpot and it is determined in step 032IWS307 that the probability variation lookahead zone effect is to be executed, a variation display that is a probability variation jackpot is then displayed. The probability variation look-ahead zone effect ends when the variation display immediately before the probability variation big hit is terminated (see steps 032IWS503, S506, and S514 of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect termination processing described later). On the other hand, when the probability variation pre-reading zone effect (so-called accurate variation pre-reading zone effect of GASE) is started based on the determination that the probability variation pre-reading zone effect is to be executed in step 032IWS309 because there is only the reserved storage that is out of sync, then at most 5 When the variation display of the number of times is finished and the value of the variation number counter becomes 0, the probability variation lookahead zone effect is terminated (see steps 032IWS512 and S514 of the probability variation lookahead zone effect ending process described later).

In addition, in this example, when there is a pending storage that is a probability variation big hit, a case where the variation counter is not set is shown, but for example, a value larger than the maximum number of the total pending storage numbers (in this example, 8 The above values) may be set in the variation counter so that the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is substantially continued until a probability variation big hit occurs.

Further, in the present example, in the case of executing the probability variation lookahead zone effect of Gase, the case where the probability variation lookahead zone effect is ended when the variation display of a maximum of 5 times is uniformly performed is shown. I can't stop. For example, the probability variation look-ahead zone effect may be configured to be terminated when the variable display of a maximum of four or seven times is completed, or whether or not the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is determined by a lottery process. The probability variation look-ahead zone effect may be terminated when the lottery process is won.

Further, in this example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the probability variation prefetch zone effect can be started by executing the probability variation prefetch zone effect start processing (step 032IWS8003) in the variable display start setting process (step S171). Although the configuration is shown, it is not limited to such a processing mode. For example, in the prefetching advance notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process (step S76), the same process as in FIG. 8-5 may be performed to start the probability variation prefetch zone effect. Further, in this case, for example, the probability variation prefetch zone effect may be configured to be able to be started even during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Further, for example, in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) side, in the winning determination process (step 032IWS1207, S1227), the same process as in FIG. 8-5 is performed to start the probability variation prefetch zone effect. Then, a command indicating that is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 side is configured to start the probability variation prefetch zone effect on the basis of receiving the command designating the start of the probability variation prefetch zone effect. Good.

(Reach effect setting process)
FIG. 8-7 is a flowchart showing the reach effect setting process (step 032IWS8004). In the reach effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the variable display started this time is a probability change big hit (step 032IWS401). Whether or not the variation display is a probability variation big hit can be determined by, for example, checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If the variation display is a probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the reach effect with the probability variation pattern as the reach symbol (step 032IWS402).

In addition, in this example, in the case of a variation display that is a probability variation big hit, a case is shown in which the reach effect is always performed with the probability variation pattern as a reach symbol, but the invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured such that a reach effect in which a non-probability variation pattern is a reach pattern is started, and the reach effect may be executed in a mode in which the rank is increased from the non-probability variation symbol to the probability variation symbol.

Further, for example, the reach effect with the non-probability variation pattern as the reach pattern is executed, the big hit symbol of the non-probability variation symbol is temporarily displayed, and then the re-lottery effect is executed to confirm and display the big hit symbol of the probability variation symbol. In some cases, it may be configured.

If it is not the variation display that is the probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the variation display started this time is the normal big hit (step 032IWS403). Whether or not the variable display is usually a big hit can be determined by, for example, checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is a variation display that is usually a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the reach effect with the non-probability variation pattern as the reach pattern (step 032IWS404).

If it is not the variation display that is usually a big hit (that is, if it is the variation display that is out of alignment), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the after-probability variation prefetch zone effect flag is set (step 032IWS405). If the after-probability variation prefetch zone effect flag is set (that is, if it is the first variable display after the completion of the probability variation prefetch zone effect), the effect control CPU 120 resets the after-probability variation prefetch zone effect flag ( Step 032IWS406). Further, the effect control CPU 120 selects the reach effect determination table for after completion of the probability variation prefetch zone effect as a table for determining the reach effect (step 032IWS407).

If the after-probability change prefetch zone effect flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the variation counter is 1 (step 032IWS408). If the value of the variation counter is 1 (that is, if it is the final variation display during execution of the probability variation prefetch zone effect of Gase), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final table as a table for determining the reach effect. The reach effect determination table for variation is selected (step 032IWS409).

On the other hand, if the value of the variation counter is not 1, the effect control CPU 120 selects the normal reach effect determination table as the table for determining the reach effect (step 032IWS410).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the reach effect determination table selected in steps 032IWS407, S409, and S410, and determines the presence or absence of the reach effect and the reach symbol (step 032IWS411).

FIG. 8-8 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the reach effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 8-8(A) shows a specific example of the reach effect determination table for after completion of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect selected in step 032IWS407. Further, FIG. 8-8(B) shows a specific example of the reach effect determination table for final fluctuation selected in step 032IWS409. Further, FIG. 8-8(C) shows a specific example of the normal reach effect determination table selected in step 032IWS410.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-8(A), in the reach effect determination table for after completion of the probability variation prefetch zone effect (that is, when the first variable display is performed after the completion of the probability variation prefetch zone effect, ), as compared with the normal reach effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(C), the reach effect execution probability is 60% (50% of the reach effect with the non-probability variation pattern as the reach symbol and the probability variation symbol reach. With the total of 10% of reach production as a design), the execution probability of reach production with a non-probability variation reach pattern is 50% higher than the reach production with a probability variation reach pattern. There is. Therefore, in the present example, in the first variable display after the end of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect, the reach effect in which the non-probability variation pattern is the reach pattern is easily executed.

Further, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 8-8(B), in the reach effect determination table for final change (that is, in the last change display during execution of the probability change prefetch zone effect of Gase), FIG. Compared to the normal reach production determination table shown in (C), the reach production execution probability is 40% (10% of reach production with a non-probability variation pattern as a reach pattern and 30 of reach production with a probability variation pattern as a reach pattern) %), the probability of executing the reach production using the probability variation pattern as the reach design is 30% higher than the reach production using the non-probability variation pattern as the reach design. Therefore, in the present example, in the final variation display during the execution of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect of Gase, the reach effect in which the probability variation pattern is the reach pattern is easily executed.

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 032IWS405 to S407, the execution probability of the reach effect in the first variation after the end of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect and the probability of the reach effect with the non-probability variation pattern as the reach symbol are set. Although the case of increasing the number is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, after completion of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect, it may be configured to increase the execution probability of the reach effect or the execution probability of the reach effect with the non-probability variation pattern as the reach pattern over a plurality of variations. In this case, for example, after completion of the probability variation lookahead zone effect, step 032IWS407 is executed and the reach effect determination table for after completion of the probability variation lookahead zone effect shown in FIG. It may be configured to be selected.

When the reach effect is determined in steps 032IWS402, S404, and S411, in step 032IWS8005 of the variable display start setting process, the process table including the reach effect of the determined reach symbol is selected, and in accordance with the selected process table, step 032IWS8007. By executing the variable display effect process (step S172), the reach effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

(Waiting process for special maps)
8-9 is a flowchart showing a special figure per wait process (step S173) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the special figure hit waiting process, first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed is set (step 032IWS8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, it moves to step 032IWS8306. In this characteristic part 032IW, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step 032IWS8305. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when executing the big hit mid effect. Therefore, when the stop symbol display flag is set, it means that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, but the big hit mid-effect is not yet executed, so the process for displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 032IWS8302 is executed. Without performing, the process proceeds to step 032IWS8306.

When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (delayed symbol, big hit symbol) (step 032IWS8302).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the probability variation prefetch zone effect end processing for ending the probability variation prefetch zone effect (step 032IWS8303).

Next, when the big hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 032IWS8302 (that is, when the deviating symbol is displayed) (N in step 032IWS8304), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 032IWS8312.

When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 032IWS8302 (Y of step 032IWS8304), the production control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag (step 032IWS8305), and receives one of the big hit start designation commands. Whether or not (for example, whether or not any jackpot start designation command reception flag is set) is confirmed (step 032IWS8306). If either big hit start designation command is received, CPU120 for production control resets the stop design indicator flag (step 032IWS8307). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 also resets the set jackpot start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the big hit (step 032IWS8308). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step 032IWS8309), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), control of the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the game effect lamp 9 as the production component, and the speakers 8L, 8R as the production component) is executed (step 032IWS8310).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the big hit (step 032IWS8311), and ends the special figure winning waiting process.

When it is determined not to make a big hit (N in step 032IWS8304), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the variable display start waiting process (step 032IWS8312), The special figure hit waiting process ends.

(Probability change look-ahead zone production end processing)
FIG. 8-10 is a flowchart showing the probability variation prefetch zone effect end processing (step 032IWS8303). In the probability variation prefetch zone effect end processing, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the probability variation prefetch zone effect execution flag is set (step 032IWS501). If the probability variation prefetch zone effect execution flag is set (that is, if the probability variation prefetch zone effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the variation counter by 1 if it is set ( Step 032IWS502).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the probability variation big hit symbol is fixedly displayed in the variation display which is finished this time (step 032IWS503). Whether or not the probability variation jackpot design is confirmed and displayed (whether or not the variation display is the probability variation jackpot) can be determined, for example, by checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. .. If the probability variation big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed, the process proceeds to step 032IWS514.

Unless the probability variation big hit symbol is fixedly displayed, the effect control CPU 120 extracts all the symbol designating commands stored in the starting winning command storage area (step 032IWS504). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning determination result indicated by the first symbol designating command stored in the starting winning command storage area is a normal jackpot (that is, the next hold). It is confirmed whether or not the memory is usually a big hit (step 032IWS505). If the next reserved memory is a normal big hit, the process proceeds to step 032IWS514.

In this example, the case where all the symbol designating commands are extracted in step 032IWS504 is shown, but what is confirmed in steps 032IWS505, S506, and S509 is only the next reserved memory and the second reserved memory. You may make it extract the symbol designating command stored in the 1st and 2nd.

Note that, for example, when there are less than four reserved memories and all the reserved memories are out of order, it is determined in step 032IWS309 of the probability variation lookahead zone effect start processing that the probability variation lookahead zone effect of Gase is to be executed. Then, the reserved storage that is a normal jackpot may be stored thereafter, and the reserved storage that is a normal jackpot may be exhausted before the variable display of five times is finished. Step 032IWS505 May be determined to be Y.

If the next pending storage is not usually a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the winning determination result indicated by the first symbol designating command stored in the starting winning command storage area is a probability varying big hit. It is confirmed whether or not it is a thing (that is, whether or not the next pending storage is a probability variation big hit) (step 032IWS506). If the next pending storage is a probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120 uses a probability variation lookahead zone effect end determination table for probability variation big hit as a table for determining whether or not to end the probability variation lookahead zone effect. By using the random number, a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to end the probability variation prefetch zone effect (step 032IWS507). When it is determined to end the probability variation prefetch zone effect (Y in step 032IWS508), the process proceeds to step 032IWS514.

If the next reserved memory is not a probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 normally determines the winning determination result indicated by the second symbol designating command stored in the starting winning command storage area. It is confirmed whether or not it is a thing (that is, whether or not the second reserved storage is a big hit usually) (step 032IWS509). If the second hold storage is a normal big hit, the effect control CPU 120 uses the probability change lookahead zone effect end determination for normal big hits as a table for determining whether or not to end the probability change lookahead zone effect. A lottery process based on a random number is performed using the table, and it is determined whether or not to end the probability variation prefetch zone effect (step 032IWS510). When it is determined to end the probability variation prefetch zone effect (Y in step 032IWS511), the process proceeds to step 032IWS514.

Note that, for example, when there are less than three reserved memories and all the reserved memories are out of order, it is determined in step 032IWS309 of the probability variation lookahead zone effect start processing that the probability variation lookahead zone effect of Gase is to be executed. Then, the pending storage that is a normal jackpot is stored after that, and before the end of the variable display of five times, the pending storage that is a normal jackpot is exhausted by leaving two or more variable displays. There is a possibility that there is a possibility that there is a case where it is determined as Y in step 032IWS509.

If the second reserved memory is not usually a big hit (N in step 032IWS509) or if the end of the probability variation prefetch zone effect is not determined (N in step 032IWS511), the effect control CPU 120 determines It is confirmed whether or not the value of the variation counter is 0 (step 032IWS512). If the value of the variation counter is 0, the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag after completion of the probability variation prefetch zone effect (step 032IWS513), and proceeds to step 032IWS514.

In step 032IWS512, based on the symbol designating command extracted in step 032IWS504, it is determined whether or not there is a pending storage that is a probability variation jackpot, and if there is no pending memory that is a probability variation jackpot (that is, the probability variation look-ahead zone of GASE). When it is determined that the effect is being executed), it is desirable to confirm the value of the variation counter and determine whether or not to end the probability variation prefetch zone effect.

FIG. 8-11 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the probability variation lookahead zone effect end determination table. Of these, FIG. 8-11(A) shows a specific example of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect end determination table for probability variation big hit used in step 032IWS507. Further, FIG. 8-11(B) shows a specific example of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect end determination table for normal big hit used in step 032IWS510. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-11(A), it is determined that the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is finished with a probability of 5% even if the next reserved memory is a probability variation big hit. It Further, as shown in FIG. 8-11(B), when the second reserved memory is a normal big hit, it is determined to end the probability variation look-ahead zone effect with a probability of 30%.

In step 032IWS514, the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image in the image display device 5 from the background image (for example, the background image of the yellow display color) according to the probability variation prefetch zone effect to the normal background image (for example, the blue display). The background color image) is changed to control to end the probability variation look-ahead zone effect (step 032IWS514). Then, the effect control CPU 120 resets the probability variation prefetch zone effect executing flag (step 032IWS515). Further, the effect control CPU 120 resets the variation counter if set (step 032IWS516).

By executing the above processing, in this example, when a probability variation big hit occurs during execution of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect, or when the next pending storage is a normal big hit or a probability variation big hit, two When the reserved memory for eyes is usually a big hit, the probability variation look-ahead zone effect may be terminated when the variable display is finished five times.

(Performance mode of probability variation prefetch zone production)
Next, an effect mode of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect will be described. 8-12 and 8-13 are explanatory diagrams for describing a specific example of the presentation mode of the probability variation lookahead zone presentation. Note that in FIGS. 8-12 and 8-13, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

First, with reference to FIGS. 8-12, a description will be given of an effect mode in which the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is executed based on the fact that there is a pending storage that is a probability variation big hit. During normal operation when the probability variation prefetch zone effect is not being executed, as shown in FIG. 8-12(A), a normal background image (for example, a background image with a blue display color) is displayed on the image display device 5, and the left middle right The variable display of the decorative pattern is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-12(A), a total pending storage display section 032IW001 is provided below the display screen of the image display device 5, and a pending display corresponding to the current total pending storage number is displayed. It FIG. 8-12(A) shows an example in which five hold displays are displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 032IW001.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12(B), it is assumed that one reserved memory is consumed and the next variable display of the decorative design is started. In this case, when the variable display is started, it is assumed that execution of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is determined based on the fact that there is a suspension memory that is a probability variation big hit among the currently stored suspension memories (step 032IWS307). , S308). In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-12(B), it is assumed that the reserved memory stored fourth is a reserved memory that is a probability variation big hit. Then, based on the fact that the execution of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect has been decided, as shown in FIG. 8-12B, a background image (for example, a yellow display color) corresponding to the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Background image), and the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is started (see step 032IWS312).

After that, the reserved storage is sequentially consumed, and the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays. Then, the pending storage that is the probability variation big hit is digested, and in the variable display of the decorative design for the retention memory, as shown in FIG. 8-12(C), the jackpot pattern of the probability variation pattern (in this example, the pattern "7"). Is confirmed and displayed. Then, based on the confirmation display of the probability variation big hit symbol (see Y in step 032IWS503), the image display device 5 is changed to a normal background image (for example, a background image of blue display color), and the probability variation prefetch zone effect is produced. Is terminated (see step 032IWS514).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 13, a description will be given of a production mode in the case of executing the probability variation look-ahead zone production in the case where there is only the reserved storage that is out of sync. In the normal time when the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is not being executed, as shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative pattern is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-13(A), a total pending storage display section 032IW001 is provided below the display screen of the image display device 5, and a pending display according to the current total pending storage number is displayed. It FIG. 8-13(A) shows an example in which five reservation displays are displayed in the combined reservation storage display unit 032IW001.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-13(B), it is assumed that one reserved memory is consumed and the next variable display of the decorative design is started. In this case, when the variable display is started, it is assumed that the execution of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is determined based on the fact that there is only the pending storage that is out of the currently stored pending storage (step 032IWS309-). See S311). Then, based on the fact that execution of the probability variation prefetch zone effect is determined, as shown in FIG. 8-13(B), a background image (for example, a yellow display color) corresponding to the probability variation prefetch zone effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Background image), and the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is started (see step 032IWS312).

After that, the reserved storage is sequentially consumed, and the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays. In addition, at the stage when the probability variation look-ahead zone effect shown in FIG. 8-13(B) was started, four holding memories were stored, but after that, a new starting winning occurs and the holding storage becomes out of position. Is increased by 2. Then, when the fifth variable display is ended after the probability variation prefetch zone effect is started, as shown in FIG. 8-13(C), the value of the variation counter is 0 (step 032IWS512). Y)), the image display device 5 changes to a normal background image (for example, a background image with a blue display color), and the probability variation prefetch zone effect ends (see step 032IWS514). In this case, the flag after completion of the probability variation prefetch zone effect is also set (see step 032IWS513).

Next, when the variation display of the decorative pattern for the first time after finishing the probability variation lookahead zone effect is started, the probability variation lookahead zone effect post-completion flag is set (see Y in step 032IWS405), which is high. It is determined with probability that the reach effect with the uncertain variation pattern as the reach pattern is executed (steps 032IWS407, S411 and FIG. 8-8(A)). Then, as shown in FIG. 8-13(D), in the first variation display of the decorative pattern after the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is finished, the non-probability variation pattern (in this example, the pattern “6”) is highly likely to be generated. The reach effect with the reach pattern is executed.

(Execution pattern of probability variation prefetch zone production)
Next, an execution pattern of the probability variation prefetch zone effect will be described. 8-14 to 8-16 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution pattern of the probability variation lookahead zone effect. FIG. 8-14(1) shows an execution pattern in the case of executing the probability variation look-ahead zone effect based on the fact that there is a pending storage that is a probability variation big hit. As shown in FIG. 8-14(1), when the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is started based on the fact that there is a pending storage for the probability variation big hit, at least when the variation display that is the probability variation big hit ends, the probability variation look-ahead zone The effect is finished (Y in step 032IWS503, step 032IWS514, and FIG. 8-12).

Further, FIG. 8-14(2) shows an execution pattern in the case of executing the probability variation look-ahead zone effect of Gase when there is only the reserved storage which is out of sync. As shown in FIG. 8-14(2), when the probability variation look-ahead zone effect of Gase is started, when the variable display at the maximum of 5 times is finished, the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is terminated (Y in step 032IWS512, step). 032IWS514).

Further, while the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is being executed, the probability variation look-ahead zone effect may be terminated even if the next pending memory is a pending memory that is usually a big hit. In the execution pattern shown in FIG. 8-14(3), the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is started based on the fact that there is only the reserved storage that is out of sync. The case where the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is ended based on the fact that the reserved memory of No. 1 has become the normal big hit is shown (Y in step 032IWS505, see step 032IWS514). In addition, in FIG. 8-14(3), the case where the pending storage next to the fifth variable display during execution of the probability variation lookahead zone effect is a holding memory that is normally a big hit is shown. If the pending storage next to the third or fourth variable display being executed is a normal big hit pending storage, the probability variation look-ahead zone effect ends when the third or fourth variable display ends. It will be.

Further, during execution of the probability variation lookahead zone effect, the probability variation lookahead zone effect may be ended with a low probability even when the next pending memory is a pending memory that is a probability variation big hit. In the execution pattern shown in FIG. 8-14(4), the next pending memory is a pending memory that is a probability variation big hit, but there is a case where the probability variation lookahead zone effect is terminated without continuing the probability variation lookahead zone effect. (See steps 032IWS506 to S507, Y in step 032IWS508, step 032IWS514, and FIG. 8-11(A)). In addition, in FIG. 8-14(3), the case where the pending storage next to the fifth variable display during the probability variation prefetch zone effect execution is a pending storage that is a probability variation big hit, for example, the probability variation prefetch zone effect. Even if the pending storage next to the 3rd or 4th variation display being executed is the pending storage that will be the probability big hit, there is a low probability that the 3rd or 4th variation display ends with a probability variation lookahead. The zone production may end.

In addition, the reach effect is executed with a high probability in the first variation display of the decorative pattern after the end of the probability variation prefetch zone effect of Gase. In the execution pattern shown in FIG. 8-15(5), the reach effect is executed with a higher probability than usual in the variable display of the decorative pattern for the first time after finishing the probability variation look-ahead zone effect of Gase, and at the same time the probability is high. In the reach effect with the non-probability variation pattern as the reach pattern is executed (step 032IWS405 to 407, S411, FIG. 8-8(A), and FIG. 8-13).

In this example, in the case of increasing the probability of reaching the execution of the reach effect and the probability of executing the reach effect with the non-probability variation pattern as the reach pattern in the first variation display of the decorative pattern after the end of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect of Gase. Although shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, in the execution pattern shown in FIG. 8-15(5), the reach effect is executed with the same probability as usual even in the first variation display of the decorative design after the end of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect. You may comprise.

Further, during the execution of the probability variation lookahead zone effect, the probability variation lookahead zone effect may be terminated even when the second hold storage is a hold storage that is usually a big hit. In the execution pattern shown in FIG. 8-15(6), the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is started based on the fact that there is only the pending storage that is out of sync. A case is shown in which the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is ended based on the fact that the second reserved memory is a reserved memory that is usually a big hit (steps 032IWS509 to S510, Y in step 032IWS511, step 032IWS514). Therefore, in the execution pattern shown in FIG. 8-15(6), the normal big hit is not immediately generated after the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is finished, but the normal variation is a big hit once the deviating variable display is sandwiched once. Will end.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-15(6), after the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is finished, a variation display that is a deviant is sandwiched once, and then a normal jackpot occurs, and the probability variation state ends. Although the case where the control is performed as described above is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured such that a deviating variable display may be sandwiched twice or three times and then a normal jackpot may be set to end the probability variation state.

Further, when the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is ended based on the fact that the next reservation memory is a hold-up memory that is usually a big hit, the reach effect is executed at a high rate in the final variation during the execution of the probability change look-ahead zone effect. There are cases. In the execution pattern shown in FIG. 8-15(7), the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is terminated based on the fact that the next retention memory is a retention memory that is usually a big hit, and the final variation during execution of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is In the case of the fifth variation, the reach effect is executed with a higher probability than usual, and the reach effect with the probability variation pattern as the reach pattern is executed with a higher probability (steps 032IWS408 to 409, S411, and FIG. 8). -8 (B)).

Further, when the probability variation lookahead zone effect is ended based on the fact that the next retention memory is a probability variation jackpot, the reach effect is executed at a high rate in the final variation during execution of the probability variation lookahead zone effect. There are cases. In the execution pattern shown in FIG. 8-15(8), the probability variation prefetch zone effect is terminated based on the fact that the next reservation memory is a reservation memory that is a probability variation big hit, and the final variation during execution of the probability variation prefetch zone effect is In the case of the fifth variation, the reach effect is executed with a higher probability than usual, and the reach effect with the probability variation pattern as the reach pattern is executed with a higher probability (steps 032IWS408 to 409, S411, and FIG. 8). -8 (B)).

In addition, when the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is terminated based on the fact that the next reservation memory is a probability variation jackpot, even when the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is terminated at the third or fourth variation, The reach effect may be executed with high probability in the final variation. In the execution pattern of the modified example shown in FIG. 8-16 (9), the probability variation lookahead zone effect is created based on the fact that the next pending memory is a pending memory that is a probability variation jackpot in the fourth variation during execution of the probability variation lookahead zone effect. Along with the end, a case is shown in which the reach effect (in particular, reach effect using a probability change symbol as a reach symbol) is executed with high probability in the variation display of the fourth variation.

Further, when the probability variation lookahead zone effect is ended based on the fact that the next hold memory is a hold memory which is usually a big hit, even when the probability variation lookahead zone effect is ended at the third or fourth variation, Similar to the execution pattern of the modified example shown in FIG. 8-16(9), the reach effect may be executed with high probability in the final variation.

Even in the case of the characteristic part 032IW, even if the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is finished at the third variation or the fourth variation based on the fact that the next pending storage is the pending storage that is the probability big jackpot or the normal big hit, Since the reach effect may be executed with a low probability (step 032IWS410, see FIG. 8-8(C)), the probability variation prefetch zone effect is executed by the execution pattern of FIG. 8-16(9), although at a low rate. May be done.

Further, the execution pattern of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect shown in FIGS. 8-14 to 8-16 is not limited thereto, and various execution patterns may be configured. For example, there may be an execution pattern in which the probability variation lookahead zone effect is once ended and then the probability variation lookahead zone effect is started again. In this case, for example, immediately after ending the probability variation look-ahead zone effect, immediately after a feeling of crisis that the probability variation state may end by executing reach production with a non-probability variation pattern as a reach pattern in the outlier variation, An execution pattern may be provided so that the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is started again to give a sense of security.

As described above, according to the characteristic part 032IW, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, derivation display of a jackpot symbol), and the advantageous state. It is possible to control to a different first special state (for example, a time saving state) and a second special state (for example, a probability change state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state. Further, in the second special state, when the advantageous state is controlled, the notice effect for giving notice that the advantageous state control is performed and then the second special state is controlled (for example, FIGS. 8-12 (B), (C) and FIG. 8). -13 (B), (C) Probability variation look-ahead zone effect) is executed. In addition, after executing the suggestion effect (for example, reach effect using a non-probability variation pattern shown in FIG. 8-13(D) as a reach pattern) suggesting that the first special state is controlled, and after the notice effect is finished. The suggestive effect is executed at a high rate (see FIG. 8-13). Therefore, the effect after the notice effect can be enhanced.

Specifically, during the period in which the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is being executed, it is possible to give a sense of security that there is usually no possibility of a big hit, and there is no danger of the probability variation state ending. When the effect is finished, the player usually feels disappointed because the jackpot is usually a big hit and the player is associated with the end of the probability variation state. Therefore, in this example, by executing the reach production using the non-probability variation pattern as the reach pattern immediately after the variation of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect, a feeling of crisis that the probability variation state may end may be fueled. Therefore, it is possible to realize a change in the production situation from a sense of security to a sense of crisis. Also, after performing a reach production with a non-probability variation pattern as a reach design and disappointing the player once, the reach will be lost and the probability variation state will continue, so a transition from a sense of crisis to a sense of security A change can be realized, and a staging effect can be enhanced.

Further, according to the present characteristic unit 032IW, after the notice effect is finished, an effect that suggests that the predetermined condition is satisfied as the suggestion effect (for example, the non-probable variation pattern shown in FIG. 8-13(D) is used as the reach symbol). Reach production). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect by the effect suggesting that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

In particular, in this example, after the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is finished, since the reach effect with the non-probability variation pattern as the reach symbol is executed in the deviation variation, the reach effect with the reach pattern as the reach probability non-probability variation symbol The staging effect can be enhanced.

Further, according to the characteristic part 032IW, a game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) for controlling the progress of the game, and information from the game control means (for example, effect control). The production control means (for example, CPU120 for production control) which controls production based on a command) is provided. Further, the game control means outputs variable display pattern information (for example, fluctuation pattern command) that can specify the variable display pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern). Then, the effect control means determines whether or not the variable display mode is the reach mode for one variable display pattern specified by the variable display pattern information (for example, reach effect setting process (step 032IWS8004)). reference). Therefore, the effect can be suitably executed.

Further, according to the characteristic part 032IW, it is possible to control to the second special state after the notice effect is finished (for example, see the execution pattern of the probability variation prefetch zone effect shown in FIG. 8-14(4)). Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation after the notice production is finished. For example, even if the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is finished, the probability variation state does not always end, and the probability variation jackpot may occur and the probability variation state may continue, so disappointing that the probability variation look-ahead zone effect has ended. The feeling can be reduced.

Further, according to the characteristic part 032IW, when the first special state is controlled after the notice effect is finished, the first special state is controlled after a predetermined period has passed after the notice effect is finished. The notice effect is ended (for example, refer to the execution pattern of the probability variation prefetch zone effect shown in FIG. 8-15(6)). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disappointment when the first special state is controlled after the notice production is finished. For example, it is not always the case that the normal jackpot is reached immediately after the probability variation look-ahead zone effect ends, and the probability variation state ends, and there is a case where a fluctuation display of the out-of-range variation is executed. Can be reduced.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 032IW, variable display (for example, variable display of decorative patterns) is executed. Further, even when the notice effect is ended in the variable display that is not controlled to the advantageous state, the variable display mode can be set to the reach mode (for example, FIGS. 8-15(7) and (8)). ) Refer to the execution pattern of the probability variation look-ahead zone effect). Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced. For example, it is possible to give a sense of expectation even when the probability variation look-ahead zone effect of Gase is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this example, the case where the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in the order of winning the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening has been shown. It is not limited to various forms. For example, in a gaming machine that executes the variable display of the second special symbol with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol, the configuration shown by the feature unit 032IW may be applied. In this case, for example, if it is controlled also in the time saving state during the probability variation state, the variation display of the second special symbol is almost executed during the probability variation state, so that the variation display of the second special symbol is performed a plurality of times. The probability variation prefetch zone effect shown by the main feature unit 032IW may be configured to be executed.

Further, in this example, the case where the probability variation prefetch zone effect is executed by changing the background image of the image display device 5 is shown, but the effect mode of the probability variation prefetch zone effect is not limited to such a mode. For example, the probability variation look-ahead zone effect may be executed by displaying a predetermined character image over a plurality of variable displays or by operating an effect accessory over a plurality of variable displays, and various modes are possible. ..

The configuration shown by the characteristic part 032IW is applicable not only to the case of performing the probability variation look-ahead zone effect that suggests whether or not the probability variation state continues, but also to the case of performing various zone effects. For example, the zone effect indicating whether or not the effect mode is changed may be configured to be executable, and the configuration indicated by the characteristic part 032IW may be applied.

Further, it is also possible to apply the configuration shown by the characteristic part 032IW to a slot machine. When applied to a slot machine, for example, the first special state is controlled to RT (replay time), and the second special state is controlled to AT (assist time) or ART (assist replay time). If a winning combination is won during execution of the effect, the winning combination may be AT or ART.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

In addition, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification and the configurations shown in the below-described embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be understood that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplifications in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description, but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

As the gaming machine of the present invention, other than the advantageous state, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, derivation display of a jackpot symbol). A state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100(() for controlling a first special state (for example, a time saving state) and a second special state (for example, a probability changing state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state) Specifically, the CPU 103) and a notice effect for notifying that the second special state will be controlled to the second special state after the advantageous state control in the second special state (for example, FIG. 8-12(B)). , (C) and the probability variation look-ahead zone effects shown in FIGS. 8-13 (B) and (C)), a notice effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 032IWS312), and a first special Suggestion production execution means (for example, step in CPU 120 for production control) for executing suggestion production suggesting that the state is controlled (for example, reach production using the non-probability variation pattern shown in FIG. 8-13(D) as reach pattern) 032IWS8004, step 032IWS8005 is provided with a process table including a reach effect to select step 032IWS8007 and variable display effect processing (step S172)), the suggestion effect executing means, after the notice effect is finished The production can be executed at a high rate (for example, the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production with the non-probable variation pattern as the reach symbol with a high probability in step 032IWS407 as shown in FIG. 8-8(A). 8-13.) Further, as an advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit) and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, , 6 round big hit, normal big hit), and the first advantageous state is more advantageous than the second advantageous state at the end effect period at the end of the advantageous condition (for example, ending effect time). ) As the end effect selection means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11) that selects a long period at a high rate, and the end effect during the end effect period (for example, , Ending effect) capable of executing the ending effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, and FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26), and the ending effect executing means, First advantage It is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of end effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect effect period of the state, and a plurality of executable effects can be executed during the end effect effect period of the first advantageous state. An end-time effect reception unit (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B) that can accept the selection of the end-time effect executed by the end-time effect execution unit from among the kinds of end-time effects, from the player. .. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step S784 in FIG. 9-20, and step S784 in FIG. 9-21. The period in which the selection can be accepted may be the first half of the finish production period or the second half of the big hit round. Specifically, in the 16R jackpot, it may be a period from the reception of the 13R start command to the reception of the 16R end command. ) Is further provided with a gaming machine.

With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect after the notice effect. Further, since the period of time controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, it is possible to reduce the gaming value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

In addition, as the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, derivation display of a jackpot symbol), an advantageous state Is a state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) capable of controlling a different first special state (for example, a time saving state) and a second special state (for example, a probability variation state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state. 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) and a notice effect for notifying that the second special state will be controlled after the advantageous state control when the advantageous state is controlled in the second special state (for example, FIG. 8-12 ( B), (C) and the preliminary change prefetch zone effect shown in FIGS. 8-13 (B) and (C)), a notice effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 which executes step 032IWS312), and Suggestion production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120) that executes a suggestion production (for example, reach production with a non-probability variation pattern shown in FIG. 8-13(D) as a reach pattern) suggesting that the control is performed in one special state. In step 032IWS8004 and step 032IWS8005, the process table including the reach effect is selected and step 032IWS8007 and the variable display effect effect process (step S172) are provided. Is capable of executing the suggestive effect at a high rate (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in step 032IWS407, as shown in FIG. Execution is determined (see FIGS. 8 to 13), a normal state (for example, a normal state), a special state including a first special state and a second special state, and a first advantageous state (for example, an advantageous state). , 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) and can be controlled to the normal state. When it is controlled to an advantageous state when it is controlled to a special state (for example, when it is a big hit of so-called consecutive chan) In the case of), the end time effect selecting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, FIG. 9) that selects a long time period as the end time effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state at a high rate. − 10 step S366, FIG. 9-11) and end effect production means (eg effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 9-22) capable of executing end effect (eg ending effect) during the end effect period. , FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26), and the end time effect executing means includes a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Of the plurality of types of end-time effects that can be executed in the end-time effect period of the first advantageous state, any of the end-time effects executed by the end-time effect executing means can be selected. End effect receiving means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B) that can be accepted from a person. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step S784 in FIG. 9-20, and step S784 in FIG. 9-21. ) Is further provided with a gaming machine.

With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect after the notice effect. Further, since the period of time controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, it is possible to reduce the gaming value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

In addition, as the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, derivation display of a jackpot symbol), an advantageous state Is a state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) capable of controlling a different first special state (for example, a time saving state) and a second special state (for example, a probability variation state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state. 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) and a notice effect for notifying that the second special state will be controlled after the advantageous state control when the advantageous state is controlled in the second special state (for example, FIG. 8-12 ( B), (C) and the preliminary change prefetch zone effect shown in FIGS. 8-13 (B) and (C)), a notice effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 which executes step 032IWS312), and Suggestion production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120) that executes a suggestion production (for example, reach production with a non-probability variation pattern shown in FIG. 8-13(D) as a reach pattern) suggesting that the control is performed in one special state. In step 032IWS8004 and step 032IWS8005, the process table including the reach effect is selected and step 032IWS8007 and the variable display effect effect process (step S172) are provided. Is capable of executing the suggestive effect at a high rate (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in step 032IWS407, as shown in FIG. Execution is determined. (See FIG. 8-13.) Further, as an advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit) and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. It is possible to control at least one of (for example, 6 round big hit, normal big hit), and first special identification information (for example, first special symbol) and first special identification information as special identification information (for example, special symbol). The variable display of the second special identification information (for example, the second special symbol), which is more advantageous to the player than the player, can be executed, and the information regarding the variable display of the first special identification information is the first reserved storage information (for example, the first First reserve storage means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) that can be stored as reserve storage, and information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second reserve storage information (for example, second reserve storage). age When the second hold storage information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM 102) that can be stored by the first hold storage information and the second hold storage information are stored together, the second hold storage information is stored. The variable display of the second special identification information based on the variable display control means for executing the variable display of the first special identification information with priority (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second Special symbol display device 4B, refer to FIG. 9-4), and control to the advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information, as compared to the case of being controlled to the advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. In this case, the end time effect selecting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, FIG. 9) that selects a long time period as the end time effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state at a high rate. -10 step S366, FIG. 9-11) and end effect production execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, step of FIG. 9-22) capable of executing end effect (for example, ending effect) during the end effect period. S772, and FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26), the end time effect execution means, during the end time effect period of the first advantageous state, a plurality of kinds of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E). ) Can be executed, and the end-time production executed by the end-time production executing means is selected from among a plurality of types of end-time productions that can be executed in the end-time production period of the first advantageous state. A finish production reception unit (for example, a production control CPU 120, a stick controller 31A, and a push button 31B) that can be received from the player. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step S784 in FIG. 9-20, and step S784 in FIG. 9-21. ) Is further provided with a gaming machine.

With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect after the notice effect. Further, since the period of time controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, it is possible to reduce the gaming value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

It should be noted that, in addition to the second special state period, the notice effect for giving a notice that the control to the second special state is performed after the advantageous state control is executed in the end period of the first advantageous state in addition to the second special state period. You may do it. For example, the probability variation prefetch zone effect (for example, changing the background image) may be started from the end time period of the first advantageous state (for example, 16 round probability variation big hit). By doing so, as compared with the case where the advance notice effect is performed after the second special state (for example, the probability change state), the interest of the game is reduced due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state. It can be reduced. In addition, when the probability variation look-ahead zone effect is performed in the ending time period of the first advantageous state, an option of the effect in the ending effect may be selected according to the look-ahead determination result. For example, from among a plurality of types of finish effects (for example, 5 types of production pattern A to production pattern E), any finish production (for example, any one of 5 types of production pattern A to production pattern E 3 Type) is presented to the player as an option, and the jackpot expectation or the probability variation probability jackpot expectation changes depending on the combination of the end productions presented to the player (for example, the production pattern C rather than the choices of the production patterns A, B, and C).・The D/E option has higher expectations. By doing so, since the player pays attention to the options in the finish effect, it is possible to further reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as an example of the form of a gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the effect after the notice production, prevent gambling from becoming too high, and reduce the decrease in the interest of the game. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a person, and as the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, a probability variation jackpot). , A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to at least one of a second advantageous state (for example, 6 round big hit, normal big hit) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. , The first advantageous state selects a longer period as the end effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state at a higher rate than the second advantageous state, the end effect selection means (for example, Microcomputer 100 for game control, step S366 of FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11) and end time effect execution means (for example, effect control) capable of executing end effect (for example, ending effect) in the end effect period. CPU120, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, and FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26), the end time effect execution means, during the end effect time period of the first advantageous state, a plurality of kinds of end time effect ( For example, it is possible to execute any one of the effect patterns A to E and is executed by the ending effect executing means from among a plurality of types of ending effects that can be executed in the ending effect period of the first advantageous state. The end effect reception means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or another operation unit for setting) that can accept the selection of the effect at the end that is received from the player may be used. 9-19, step S752A, FIG. 9-20, and step S784 of FIG. 9-21. The period during which the selection can be accepted may be the first half of the ending production period or the second half of the big hit round. Specifically, the 16R jackpot may include a period from the reception of the 13R start command to the reception of the 16R end command.).

Alternatively, it can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and can be controlled to a special state different from the advantageous state after completion of the advantageous state (for example, probability variation state, time saving state, high base state). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), a normal state (for example, a normal state), a special state, an advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit), a first A game state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of a second advantageous state (for example, a 6 round big hit, a normal big hit), which is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and a normal state. When controlled to an advantageous state when controlled to a special state (for example, a so-called continuous chan) In the case of a big hit), an end time effect selecting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, which selects a long period at a high rate as an end effect time period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state) 9-10) and finish production execution means capable of executing finish production (for example, ending production) during finish production period (for example, production control CPU 120, FIG. 9-22). And step S772 of FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26), the end time effect executing means, during the end time effect period of the first advantageous state, a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect). Any one of the patterns E) can be executed, and an end time effect executed by the end time effect execution means is selected from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. May be an end effect reception unit that can be accepted from the player (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. The game machine further including step S784 in FIGS. 9-20 and 9-21.

Alternatively, as special identification information (for example, a special symbol), first special identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and second special identification information that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information (for example, a second special symbol) ) Variable display can be executed, and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a probability change state, a time saving state, It is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a high base state, and information about a variable display of the first special identification information can be stored as first pending storage information (for example, first pending storage). A first hold storage means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM 102) and a second hold that can store information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second hold storage information (for example, second hold storage). When the storage means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM 102) and the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are stored together, the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is stored. Variable display, the variable display control means for executing the variable display in preference to the variable display of the first special identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the figure 9-4), the first advantageous state (eg, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit), and the second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (eg, 6 round big hit, normal) The game state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) which can be controlled to at least one of the big hits, and the second state as compared with the case where the state is advantageously controlled as a result of the variable display of the first reserved memory information. When the controlled state is changed to the advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the held storage information, a long period is selected at a high rate as the finish production period (for example, ending production time) at the end of the advantageous state. Means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11), and end time effect execution means (at which end time effect (for example, ending effect) can be executed during the end time effect period ( For example, the effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 9-22, and FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26) are provided, and the end-time effect performing means includes a plurality of types during the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state. End production (for example, production performance One of the turn A to effect pattern E) can be executed, and an end effect executed by the end effect executing means from among a plurality of types of end effects that can be executed in the end effect period of the first advantageous state. An end time effect acceptance unit (eg, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B) that can accept the selection of the time effect from the player. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step S784 in FIG. 9-20, and step S784 in FIG. 9-21. ) Is further provided with a gaming machine. Below, an example of a form example of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

Hereinafter, the characteristic portion of another embodiment will be described.
(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 069F of the present embodiment)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, problems may occur from the following viewpoints. Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine in which a big hit with a long ending period in which an end effect of a big hit is executed and a short big hit (see, for example, JP-A-2007-7165). In the gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2007-7165, a short ending time is selected when the probability variation big hit occurs. However, when advantageous big hits occur consecutively, the ending period is shortened, the interval between big hits and the next big hits is shortened, and the speed at which prize balls can be obtained increases Could be too high. The gaming machines according to the inventions 069F to 071F that solve such problems are proposed below.

Further, conventionally, there has been a gaming machine in which an advantageous big hit is set to have a longer fanfare period at the start of the big hit than a disadvantageous big hit (for example, see JP-A-2014-148). However, simply setting the advantageous big hit fanfare period long may lead to a decline in interest. The gaming machines according to the inventions 073F and 074F that solve such problems are proposed below. In the following, the features of the gaming machines according to the inventions 069F to 071F, the invention 073F, and the invention 074F will be represented as a characteristic portion 069F. The characteristic part 069F can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above.

FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, showing a layout of main members. Hereinafter, description of the configuration common to that of FIG. 1 will not be repeated.

The game area 2 formed on the board surface of the game board has a left game area 2A on the left side of the top side of the image display device 5 and a right game area 2B on the right side. If the left game area 2A that is the first game area and the right game area 2B that is the second game area are divided by the end surface of the image display device 5 inside the game area 2 or the arrangement PL of the nails, for example. Good. When the game ball that is shot from the hitting ball launching device and is driven into the game area 2 is guided to the left game area 2A that is the first game area, for example, by being guided along the nail arrangement PL, , It becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area 2B which is the second game area.

In the left game area 2A, a normal winning ball device 6A is provided. For example, the normal winning ball device 6A is provided below the center of the image display device 5. The normal winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. As described above, the left game area 2A is always provided with the normal winning ball device 6A that forms the first starting winning hole into which the game ball can enter.

In the right game area 2B, a normal variable winning ball device 6B is provided. The normal variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable blades that is changed to a closed state that is a vertical position and an open state that is a tilted position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. 9-2. A tulip-shaped accessory is provided to form the second starting winning opening. As an example, in the normal variable winning prize ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball does not pass through the second starting winning hole. Put in a state. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state, so that the game ball can pass through the second starting winning hole. Open it. The normal variable winning ball device 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second starting winning port, while the solenoid 81 is in the enlarged open state when the solenoid is in the on state. May be configured such that the game ball is difficult to enter. Thus, in the right game area 2B, the normal variable that can be changed to the first variable state in which the game ball can pass through the second start winning hole and the second variable state in which the game ball cannot pass or is difficult to pass. A winning ball device 6B is provided.

By the arrangement of the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B and the like in the left game area 2A and the right game area 2B, the game ball guided to the left game area 2A which is the first game area is the second game area. It is impossible or difficult to pass through the second start winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B provided in the right game area 2B. In addition, the game ball guided to the right game area 2B, which is the second game area, has the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A provided in the left game area 2A, which is the first game area. Impossible or difficult to pass.

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 9-2. The game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 9-2. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and if the first reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, the first start The condition is met. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and if the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than the predetermined upper limit value, the second start is performed. The condition is met. The number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first starting opening switch 22A and the number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second starting opening switch 22B. May be the same or different in number.

Two special variable winning ball devices are provided below the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The upper special variable winning ball device 7A includes a upper special winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82A for the upper special winning opening door shown in FIG. 9-2. The upper special winning opening door opens and closes. Forming a top prize hole that changes to. As an example, in the upper special variable winning ball device 7A, the upper special winning opening door closes the upper special winning opening when the solenoid 82A for the upper special winning opening door is off. On the other hand, in the upper special variable winning ball device 7A, the upper special winning opening door opens the upper special winning opening when the solenoid 82A for the upper special winning opening door is on. The game ball that has entered the upper special winning opening formed on the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is detected by, for example, the upper special winning opening switch 23A shown in FIG. 9-2. In addition, in this embodiment, the upper special winning opening and the lower special winning opening have the same door shape, but the shapes of the two special winning openings may be different. For example, one of them may be an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that change between a closed state and an open state like the normal variable winning ball device 6B, or a state stored in the game area 2. It may be a winning opening that changes to a state of protruding from.

The lower special variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a lower special winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82B for the lower special winning opening door shown in FIG. 9-2. Form a lower prize hole that changes to. As an example, in the lower special variable winning a prize ball device 7B, the lower special winning opening door closes the lower special winning opening when the solenoid 82B for the lower special winning opening door is off. On the other hand, in the lower special variable winning a prize ball device 7B, when the solenoid 82B for the lower special winning opening door is on, the lower special winning opening door opens the lower special winning opening. The game ball that has entered the lower special winning opening formed on the lower special variable winning a prize ball device 7B is detected by, for example, the lower special winning opening switch 23B shown in FIG. 9-2.

A large number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls pass through the upper special winning opening formed by the upper special variable winning ball device 7A and the lower large winning opening formed by the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. That is, the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is in the first state advantageous to the player by opening the upper special winning opening by the upper special winning opening door. The lower special variable winning ball device 7B is in the first state, which is advantageous to the player, by opening the lower special winning opening through the lower special winning opening door. On the other hand, the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is in the second state, which is disadvantageous to the player, by closing the upper special winning opening with the upper special winning opening door. The lower special variable winning ball device 7B is in the second state, which is disadvantageous to the player, by closing the lower special winning opening with the lower special winning opening door. In addition, instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass through the upper and lower prize holes, or in addition to the closed state, the game ball does not easily pass through the upper and lower prize holes. State may be provided.

Inside the upper special variable winning ball device 7A, a discharge path is provided through which the game balls that have entered the upper special winning opening that has been opened by the upper special winning opening door are discharged from the upper special variable winning ball device 7A. There is. The game ball discharged from the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is detected by the first discharge switch 24C installed in the discharge path.

Inside the lower special variable winning ball device 7B, the game ball that has entered the lower special winning opening that has been opened by the lower special winning opening door passes through a predetermined probability variation area, or does not pass through it. A guide route for guiding the player to the discharge route discharged from the special variable winning ball device 7B is provided. The game ball that has entered the lower special variable winning ball device 7B first passes through the route provided with the lower special winning opening switch 23B for detecting the winning game ball, and then the guide path to the probability variation area and the probability variation. It is guided to a branch point to a guideway that does not pass through the area and guides to the discharge path. When the game ball guided to the branch point flows down the guide path to the probability variation area, this game ball is detected by the probability variation area switch 24A, and the probability variation control condition for becoming the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state ends To establish. That is, the place where the probability variation area switch 24A is installed is defined as the probability variation area, and based on the fact that the game ball has passed through this probability variation area, a predetermined probability variation control condition can be established. Since the probability variation area is inside the lower special variable winning ball device 7B, only the game balls that have won the lower special variable winning ball device 7B can pass through.

The probability variation area changes to an open state in which the game ball can pass and a closed state in which it cannot pass by the probability variation area lid driven by the solenoid 82C for the probability variation area lid. As an example, when the probability variation region lid solenoid 82C is in the off state, the probability variation region cover moves to a position where it closes the probability variation region and closes the probability variation region. On the other hand, when the probability variation region cover solenoid 82C is in the ON state, the probability variation region cover moves to a position where the probability variation region lid is not blocked, and the probability variation region is opened. The game ball that has reached the branch point when the probability variation area is in the closed state does not pass through the probability variation area and is discharged from the lower special variable winning ball device 7B as it is. In this case, the game ball is detected by the second discharge switch 24B installed on the common discharge path. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the branch point when the probability variation area is in the open state passes through the probability variation area and is detected by the probability variation area switch 24A installed in the probability variation area. Then, the game ball that has passed through the probability variation area is discharged from the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. When the gaming ball that has won the lower special variable winning ball device 7B passes through the probability variation area, the probability variation area switch 24A detects the game ball that has passed through the probability variation area, and is controlled to the probability variation state. Therefore, by adjusting the ratio of the game ball winning the lower special variable winning ball device 7B and the length of time and timing of the probability variation area cover in the permissible position, the ratio of controlling to the probability variation state is set appropriately. be able to.

In the present embodiment, the inside of the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is configured such that at least the periphery of the probability variation region is visible to the player. Therefore, it is possible for the player to confirm whether or not the game ball that has entered the lower special variable winning ball device 7B has passed through the probability variation area.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A in the left game area 2A, the gaming ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 9-2. The first starting condition is satisfied because of the above. After that, for example, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied because the previous special figure game or the jackpot gaming state has ended, the special figure game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. Is started.

When the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B in the right game area 2B, that gaming ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 9-2. As a result, the second starting condition is satisfied. After that, for example, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied because the previous special figure game or the jackpot gaming state has ended, the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Is started. However, when the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second starting winning port.

In the present embodiment, in the normal game state different from the probability variation state, the normal variable winning a prize ball device 6B is in the second variable state, so that it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second starting winning hole. .. Therefore, the special figure game using the second special figure is not started. Therefore, in the normal game state which is not yet controlled in the probability changing state, the player guides the game ball to the left game area 2A and uses the special special game based on the first special prize based on the winning at the first starting winning opening. And the "big hit" of the special figure game. In the big hit game state based on the result of the variable display result of the special hit game using the first special drawing, the game ball enters the lower special variable winning ball device 7B in a specific round. Furthermore, it becomes possible to pass through the probability variation region. When the game ball passes through the probability variation area, the probability variation confirmation flag is set, and the transition to the special game state controlled to the probability variation state is determined. After that, when the big hit game state ends, it is controlled to the probability change state, the normal variable winning a prize ball device 6B changes to the first variable state, and the game ball can pass through the second starting winning hole. In this embodiment, the second special figure game is more advantageous than the first special figure game. Therefore, the player guides the game ball to the right game area 2A, starts the special figure game using the second special figure based on the winning at the second starting winning opening, and the "big hit game" of the special figure game. Will be aimed at. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with various game experiences that change according to the game state.

In the big hit game state, the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening is opened, and the upper special variable winning ball device 7A or the lower special variable winning ball device 7B becomes the first state advantageous to the player. Then, during the predetermined period, or until a predetermined number of game balls enter the upper prize hole or the lower prize hole to generate the prize ball, the upper prize hole or the lower prize hole is continued. A round game to be opened is executed. During periods other than the execution period of the round game, the upper special winning opening and the lower special winning opening are closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate winning balls. When a game ball enters the upper prize hole, the upper prize switch 23A detects the prize ball, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball each time the game ball is detected. When a game ball enters the lower special winning opening, the lower special winning opening switch 23B detects the winning ball, and similarly a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times is reached. Therefore, in the big hit game state, the player can very easily obtain a large number of prize balls, and the game state is advantageous for the player. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may directly pay out the game balls to be prize balls, or may give a score corresponding to the number of game balls to become prize balls.

After the jackpot gaming state is over, the probability that the variable display result is "big hit" may be controlled to be higher than the normal state based on the establishment of a predetermined probability variation control condition. In the present embodiment, the probability variation control condition is that the probability variation area switch 24A detects passage of the game sphere that has entered the lower special variable prize winning ball device 7B from the lower special winning opening to the probability variation area. This probability variation state is controlled to continue until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times. That is, the end of the variable display for the predetermined number of times is the certainty change end condition.

In the probability changing state, the normal variable winning ball device 6B in the second variable state in the normal state, the first variable state in which the game ball can pass through the second starting winning port, and the second variable state in which it is impossible. Change. In this way, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball device 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state is referred to as the electric Chu opening control. In the present embodiment, the second special figure game started when the game ball has passed through the second starting winning opening is started when passing through the first starting winning opening that can be passed even in the normal state. This is more advantageous to the player than the first special figure game. Therefore, the probability change state in which the electric Chu opening control is executed is a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

It should be noted that when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the electric tube opening control may not be performed. For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the upper limit winning opening and the lower winning opening are in the open state in the big hit game state, the upper limit time is short, and the game ball is difficult to pass or cannot pass. A game is executed, and after the big hit game state ends, it may be controlled to a probability change state. In such a case, the jackpot type is also referred to as "probable". Then, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability" when the electric Chu opening control is not being performed, the probability change control is performed after the big hit game state ends, but the positive change state is performed. It is also possible not to perform the electric charge opening control.

The game ball used as a game medium in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the record information of the points given in correspondence with the number thereof have, for example, a valuable value that can be exchanged for a special prize or a general prize according to the number. I wish I had it. Alternatively, the recorded information of the game balls and the points may not be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes, but may have valuable value that can be used for another game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, the game value that can be given in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the payout of a game ball that is a prize ball and the addition of a score, and for example, control in a jackpot game state or a special game state such as a probability variation state Control, the jackpot gaming state, which is more advantageous in the case of a jackpot, is selected to be the first proportion higher than the second proportion, and the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot gaming state is the second It may include that the game situation is advantageous for the player, such as the first round number being larger than the round number, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state being the first probability higher than the second probability. ..

In this embodiment, a round game of the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot is executed. Of these, when the number of times of executing the round game becomes “3” as the specific number, the round game with the lower special winning opening opened is executed, and the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is advantageous for the player. It will be in the first state. On the other hand, when the number of times of executing the round game is other than “3” as the specific number of times, the round game with the upper special winning opening in the open state is executed, and the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is advantageous to the player. It becomes a state. In the round game executed for the third time, since the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is in the first state and the game ball that has entered the lower special variable winning ball device 7B can pass through the probability variation area, these round games are It is also called a certain variation open round game. On the other hand, the round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7A other than the third time is in the first state is also referred to as a normally open round game. In addition, the period when one round game is executed is one round, and the big hit game state executed based on one "big hit" includes a plurality of rounds. Of these, the round in which the lower special variable winning ball device 7B executed in the third time is opened is expressed as the lower opening round. The other rounds in which the upper special variable winning device 7A is in the open state are expressed as upper open rounds. That is, when the variable display result is "big hit", in the big hit game state controlled based on the "big hit", the round game provided with the operation time of the lower big winning opening door and the upper big winning A plurality of round games including a round game in which the operating time of the door is provided are executed.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "big hit", as the big hit type, in the big hit game state controlled based on the "big hit", the number of times of executing the round game is "3" as the specific number of times. , There are a plurality of types of jackpots having different upper limit times for opening the lower special winning opening. As an example, when the jackpot type is the "first jackpot", it is controlled to the "first jackpot gaming state" in which the upper limit time for opening the lower jackpot is 52 milliseconds. When the jackpot type is "second jackpot" or "third jackpot", the jackpot gaming state is set such that the upper limit time for opening the lower jackpot is longer than the first jackpot. In the first big hit game state, the control time of the open state is as short as 52 milliseconds, so that the rate at which the game ball can actually enter the lower special winning opening and enter the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is low. Therefore, when the big hit type is the "first big hit", it is unlikely that the game ball will pass through the lower big winning opening, and it is difficult to establish the probability variation control condition for entering the probability variation state after the big hit game state is over. On the other hand, in the second big hit or third big hit game state, since it is opened for about 29 seconds, if the game ball is guided to the right game area 2B in which the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is installed, the game ball has a high rate. Can enter the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. Therefore, after the end of the big hit game state, the probability variation control condition for becoming the probability variation state is easily established.

Which of the plurality of types of jackpots is selected is determined at a predetermined ratio, for example, in response to the determination that the variable display result is “big hit” at the start of the special drawing game. When a game ball enters the lower special variable winning ball device 7B, not only is a predetermined number of game balls paid out, but also the game ball passes through the probability changing area depending on the position of the probability changing area lid, and the variable display result becomes "big hit". Probability is controlled to be a probable state that is higher than the non-probable state. Therefore, the second big hit and third big hit game states are more advantageous to the player than the first big hit game state. Further, the third jackpot gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the second jackpot gaming state in that the prize balls are often paid out in the upper opening round. The second jackpot is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot in terms of payout of prize balls and establishment of the probability variation control condition.

In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display. Various processes are selected in order to control the display operation in the device 4B and to set the opening/closing operation of the special winning opening in the upper special variable winning ball device 7A and the lower special variable winning ball device 7B in a predetermined procedure. To be executed.

Subsequent to the special symbol process processing, the CPU 103 executes the probability variation area solenoid control processing for controlling the position of the probability variation area lid and the validity/invalidity of the probability variation area. In the probability variation area solenoid control process, the CPU 103 controls the opening/closing of the probability variation area lid based on the value of the probability variation area solenoid control code set in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the big hit game state being set to "1". Then, the switching control for enabling/disabling the probability variation region is executed. For example, opening and closing of the probability variation region lid and switching between valid and invalid of the probability variation region are executed based on the probability variation solenoid pattern table. The probability variation solenoid pattern table may be a table in which the timing of switching the open/closed state of the probability variation region lid and the timing of switching the validity/invalidity of the probability variation region are stored in association with the elapsed time from the start of the round in the round game. Alternatively, in connection with the opening and closing of the lower special winning opening, if the lower special winning opening is in the open state, the probability variation area may be in the open state and the probability variation area may be valid. On the other hand, when the lower special winning opening is closed, the probability variation area may be closed and the probability variation area may be invalidated. In the probability variation area solenoid control process, a usage pattern is selected from a plurality of probability variation solenoid pattern tables stored in the ROM 101 in accordance with the big hit type and the number of rounds of the round game to be executed. Then, based on the selected usage pattern, the probability variation area detection valid flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is updated. Further, by updating the probability variation area solenoid buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in accordance with the value of the read solenoid output designation data, the solenoid 82C for the probability variation area lid is turned on/off according to the solenoid output designation data. To control. That is, the position of the probability variation region lid is controlled. The probability variation region solenoid buffer is an output buffer for outputting a control signal for designating ON/OFF to the probability variation region lid solenoid 82C, and the probability variation region command in the command control process according to the value stored in the buffer. A control signal is output to the area cover solenoid 82C.

9-3 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25 of FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. 9C, the CPU 103 performs any of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Select or execute. Of the description of these processes, the same description as that described with reference to FIG. 7 will not be repeated.

The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., in the big hit game state, the execution of the round game according to the big hit type is started and the upper big prize hole or the lower big prize hole is opened. It includes a process for setting the open state and the like. In the present embodiment, this jackpot opening preprocessing determines whether or not the round game to be started is a probability variation opening round in which the lower special winning opening is opened, and if it is a probability variation opening round, Further, a process of setting the probability variation region solenoid control code to 1 is further included as common control data for supporting the start of the position control of the probability variation region lid and the start of the valid/invalid control of the probability variation region. Further, it further includes a process of updating the solenoid output data table according to the big winning opening to be opened. When the jackpot opening preprocessing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This big hit opening process is a process of measuring the elapsed time after the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the upper special winning opening switch 23A or the lower large winning opening switch 23B. Based on the number of gaming balls or the like detected by, the processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. In this big hit opening process, the lower special winning opening detection process is further executed in the probability variation opening round. In addition, the lower special winning opening detection process is based on the number of gaming balls that have won the lower special variable winning ball device 7B and the number of gaming balls discharged from the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. The process of counting the game balls in the device 7B, the process of determining whether or not the passage of the game balls to the probability variation region is detected, the probability variation confirmation flag is set when the passage of the probability variation region is detected when the probability variation region is valid. Including processing to set. When the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6". In this embodiment, when the round game is finished, whether the upper special winning opening or the lower large winning opening is closed, the process of closing the upper special winning opening and the lower large winning opening The process of closing the winning opening is executed together. Therefore, the process of determining whether the target of the closing process is the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening is unnecessary. Further, it is easy to change the design because it is only necessary to delete or add the process of making the closed state regardless of whether the number of special winning openings to be used is increased or decreased.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening is opened has reached a predetermined upper limit number, or the upper limit number has not been reached. In this case, a process of waiting until the next round game is started is included. In the present embodiment, as the jackpot opening post-processing, the above-described lower special winning opening detection processing is further executed in the probability variation opening round. In addition, after the big hit opening processing, based on the number of gaming balls in the lower special variable winning ball device 7B counted by the big winning opening detection processing, processing for allowing execution of control after the running round is further performed. included. Then, when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7".

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit ending process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed by the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the like. It includes a process of waiting until the time elapses, a process of performing various settings for controlling to the probable variation state and the time saving state in response to the success or failure of the probabilistic variation control condition, and the like. Then, when the setting for controlling the probability variation state or the time saving state is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 9-3 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 9-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is "0" (step S231). The second special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the number of the second special figure reservation storage is other than "0" in step S231 (step S231; NO), the reservation stored corresponding to the reservation number "1" in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B. Numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out as data (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a fluctuation random number buffer or the like and temporarily stored.

Subsequent to the process of step S232, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the second special storage number count value by updating the second special storage number by 1, and the second special figure is updated. The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the pending number “1” in the pending storage unit 151B is shifted upward by one entry (step S233). Further, in the processing of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so that the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1. At this time, the variable special map designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special map designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S234).

When the second special figure reservation storage number is "0" in step S231 (step S231; YES), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation storage number is "0" (step S235). The first special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved storage number count value stored in the first reserved storage number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". do it. Thus, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure pending storage number is "0", and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

When the number of the first special figure reservation storage is other than "0" in step S235 (step S235; NO), the reservation stored corresponding to the reservation number "1" in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A. As data, numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a fluctuation random number buffer or the like and temporarily stored.

Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, the first special storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the first reserved memory count value, and the first special memory is updated to be decreased by 1, and the first special map is updated. The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the pending number "1" in the pending storage unit is shifted to the upper by one entry (step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so that the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1. At this time, the variable special map designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

After performing either of the processing of steps S234 and S238, it is determined whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is “big hit” or “miss” (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, the special figure display result determination table prepared by being stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set in the use table for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, a numerical value that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates whether the special figure display result is a “big hit” according to whether the probability variation control is performed or not. ”And “miss” should be assigned to the determination result. The CPU 103 may determine the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table on the basis of the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read out from the random number buffer for variation.

FIG. 9-5(A) shows an example of determination in the process of step S239. In this example of determination, the determination rate of whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” is varied depending on the presence or absence of the probability variation control in the probability variation state. More specifically, when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” at a higher rate than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state. Therefore, in the probability variation state in which the probability variation control is performed, the special figure display result is more likely to be "big hit" and in the jackpot gaming state than in the normal state in which the probability variation control is not performed. That is, the probability variation state in which the probability variation control is performed is more advantageous to the player than the normal state in which the probability variation control is not performed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S239 is "big hit" (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S240; YES), for example, a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to an on state (step). S241), the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to the determination result as to which of the plurality of jackpot types according to the fluctuation special map designation buffer value or the like. Just do it. The CPU 103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination read from the variation random number buffer.

FIG. 9-5(B) shows an example of determination in the process of step S242. In this example of determination, the special symbols that are variably displayed in the special figure game in which the start condition is satisfied are different in the determination ratio of the big hit type depending on whether the special symbol is the first special figure or the second special figure. ing. Here, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the start condition of the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied, and the variation special figure becomes the first special figure. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the special special game display device 4B start condition of the special figure game is satisfied, the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure. In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-5(B), when the variation special map is the first special map, the big hit type is determined to be either “first big hit” or “second big hit”. On the other hand, when the variation special map is the second special map, the big hit type is only determined to be the “third big hit”. That is, the jackpot type is determined to be the “first jackpot” and the “second jackpot” only when the variation special map is the first special map. In this way, different jackpot types may be determined according to the special symbols variably displayed in the special figure game. Further, the jackpot type is determined to be "third jackpot" only when the variation special map is the second special map.

In this embodiment, a round game of the number of rounds corresponding to the type of big hit is executed, and the lower special winning opening is opened in a predetermined probability variation open round in the big hit game state. In the normal opening round, the upper prize hole is opened. Here, when the big hit type is "the second big hit" and "the third big hit", in the predetermined probability variation open round in the big hit game state, the big hit type is lower than the first big hit. The upper limit time of the open state becomes long, and the probability variation control condition for becoming the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is easily established. By determining the jackpot type according to the determination rate as shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), when the variation special map is the second special map, the big hit game at a higher rate than when it is the first special map. The probability variation control condition for achieving the probability variation state after the state ends is satisfied. That is, when the special figure display result is "big hit" in the second special figure game, the probability variation control condition is more easily established than when the special figure display result is "big hit" in the first special figure game.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is the “first jackpot”, the upper limit time for opening the lower special winning opening is as short as 52 milliseconds, so that the percentage of game balls entering the lower special winning opening is very high. Low. Therefore, the probability that the probability variation control condition is satisfied is very low. On the other hand, in the case of the “second big hit” and the “third big hit”, since the upper limit time is 29 seconds, the probability that the game ball enters the lower special winning opening is high. Therefore, the probability that the probability variation control condition is satisfied is high. In the present embodiment, when the "big hit" occurs in the probability changing state, the big hit type is determined as "second big hit" or "third big hit", so the special game is controlled from the normal game state to the positive change state. It is possible to set such that while the rate of being in the state is lowered, the “big hit” continues at a high rate once the probability variation state is once controlled. As for the “second big hit”, the probability that the probability variation control condition is satisfied is higher than that of the “first big hit” like the “third big hit”, but since the number of rounds is smaller than that of the third big hit, the “big hit” is The number of balls to be paid out as prize balls based on "."

To explain the mechanism in detail, in the special drawing game using the first special drawing, when the variable display result is "big hit", it becomes the first big hit at a predetermined rate and based on the "big hit". The probability variation control condition is not satisfied in the big hit game state controlled by, and after the big hit game state ends, the game state shifts to the normal game state that is not controlled to the probability change state. On the other hand, in the special figure game using the first special figure, in the case of the "second big hit", the probability variation control condition is satisfied at a high rate in the big hit game state controlled based on the "big hit", and the big hit game is played. After the state is finished, it is controlled to a special game state which is controlled to the probability variation state. In the special game state, the normal variable winning a prize ball device 6B is controlled to the open state, and the special figure game using the second special figure can be started. In the special figure game using the second special figure, when the variable display result is "big hit", it is always "third big hit", so that the probability change state is controlled again with a high probability after the big hit ends. For this reason, until all the special figure games of a predetermined number of times in the probability variation state are "missed" and the probability variation ending condition is satisfied, the "big hit" and the probability variation state continue in succession. With such a configuration, while the percentage of the variable display result of the big hit type being "the second big hit" is reduced in the first special figure game which is performed in the normal gaming state, the variable display result of the "second big hit" is temporarily changed. After being derived, the probability that the probability change state and the “big hit” will continue to increase will provide a sharp and exciting gaming experience.

After executing the process of step S242, the big hit type is stored (step S243). In the process of step S243, for example, by storing the data showing the determination result of the big hit type in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the big hit type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, the big hit type can be stored. Good.

When it is determined in step S240 that it is not a “big hit” (step S240; NO), after executing the processing of step S243, a pre-determined result of whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, and further, a big hit Corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the game state, the fixed special symbol is set (step S244). As an example, when it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is not “big hit”, the special symbol display result corresponds to the pre-determined result of “missing”, and the pattern becomes a losing symbol. The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if the special figure display result is determined to be a "big hit" in step S240, any of the special symbols that are predetermined as a plurality of kinds of big hit symbols, depending on the determination result of the big hit type in step S242. It may be set as a confirmed special symbol. In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is "first jackpot", the symbol "5" or "9" is used, and when it is "second jackpot", the symbol "3" is used. In the case of "3 big hits", the symbol "7" is set as the definite symbol with the special symbols respectively indicated.

After executing the process of step S244, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "1" (step S245), the special symbol normal process is ended. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1" in step S245, so that the next timer interrupt occurs, the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 9C is executed.

If the number of pending storage of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S235 (step S235; YES), after performing a predetermined demo display setting (step S246), the special symbol Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, has an effect control command for designating a demonstration display such as displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 already transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12? Determine whether or not. At this time, if it has been transmitted, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 9-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 9-3 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 first determines, for example, whether or not the special symbol finalized display flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, such as the game control flag setting unit 152, is on. (Step S261). The special figure fixed display flag is set to the ON state in response to the fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in the special figure game being derivatized and displayed.

In step S261, when the special symbol finalization display flag is off (step S261; NO), setting for deriving and displaying the finalized special symbol is performed (step S262), and the command transmission setting at the time of symbol finalization is set. It is performed (step S263). For example, an effect control command prepared in advance as a symbol determination command is set to be transmitted to the effect control board 12. Further, a predetermined constant time is set as the special figure display time (step S264). Then, after the special symbol finalized display flag is set to the on state (step S265), the special symbol stop processing is ended. At this time, since the special figure process flag is not updated, the special symbol stop processing is executed again when the next timer interrupt occurs.

When the special figure finalization display flag is ON in step S261 (step S261; YES), it is determined whether the special figure finalization display time has elapsed (step S266). At this time, if the special symbol confirmation display time has not elapsed (step S266; NO), the special symbol stop process ends. Here, since the special figure process flag is not updated, the special symbol stop processing is executed again when the next timer interrupt occurs, and waits until the special figure fixed display time elapses.

When the special figure finalization display time has elapsed in step S266 (step S266; YES), the special figure finalization display flag is cleared and turned off (step S267), and then the big hit flag is turned on. It is determined (step S268). When the big hit flag is on (step S268; YES), the fanfare production time corresponding to the big hit type is set (step S269).

FIG. 9-7 is a diagram showing a fanfare time table. Referring to FIG. 9-7, as shown in FIGS. 9-7(A) and 9-7(B), respectively, a big hit occurs in the low base state and a big hit occurs in the high base state. The fanfare production time is set in advance in accordance with the type of jackpot against the continuous consecutive times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the transmission setting of the big hit start designation command capable of specifying the fanfare production time according to the big hit type is performed (step S270), and, for example, the RAM 102 such as the game control flag setting unit 152. The big hit start flag provided in the predetermined area is set to the on state (step S271). Then, the setting for ending the probability variation control is performed (step S272). For example, as the process of step S272, a process of clearing a probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like to an off state, or a probability variation for counting the number of remaining special figure games in which the probability variation control is performed. It suffices to execute processing such as clearing the frequency counter.

The probability variation counter is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the game control counter setting unit 154, and corresponds to the upper limit number of special figure games in which probability variation control is performed when the probability variation state is reached after the jackpot gaming state ends. The initial count value may be set.

After executing the processing of step S272, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" (step S273), and then the special symbol stop processing is ended. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "4", when the next timer interrupt occurs, the big hit opening preprocessing of step S114 shown in FIG. 9C is executed.

When the big hit flag is off in step S268 (step S268; NO), the value of the special figure process flag is initialized to "0" (step S274). After executing the process of step S274, it is determined whether or not the probability variation control is to be ended (step S275). As an example, in the process of step S275, when the probability variation count value stored in the probability variation counter is other than “0”, the count value is updated by subtracting 1 from the updated value, and the updated probability variation count after updating. It is determined whether or not the count value matches a predetermined probability variation end determination value. At this time, if the probability variation end determination value matches, the probability variation control may be terminated by clearing a predetermined probability variation flag or the like. On the other hand, if it does not match the probability variation end determination value, the state of the probability variation flag is maintained, and the process of step S275 may be terminated.

After executing the process of step S275, after performing the setting for transmitting the game state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S276), the special symbol stop processing is ended. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "0", when the next timer interrupt process occurs, the special symbol normal process of step S110 shown in FIG. 9C is executed.

FIG. 9-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S114 of FIG. 9-3 as the big hit opening pre-process. In the big hit opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit start flag is on (step S291). The big hit flag is set to the on state by the processing of step S271 shown in FIG. 9-6 in response to the start of the big hit game state.

When the big hit start flag is ON in step S291 (step S291; YES), it is determined whether or not the fanfare production time has elapsed (step S292). At this time, if the fanfare production time has not elapsed (step S292; NO), the big hit opening preprocessing is ended. Here, since the special figure process flag is not updated, the jackpot opening preprocessing is executed again when the next timer interrupt occurs, and the process waits until the fanfare production time elapses.

When the fanfare production time has elapsed in step S292 (step S292; YES), as a process for starting the first round game in the big hit game state, after clearing the big hit start flag and turning it off (step) S293), for example, a round counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the control counter setting unit 154 is set to "1" as a count initial value corresponding to the number of round game executions (step S294).

When the jackpot start flag is OFF in step S291 (step S291; NO) and after the processing of step S294 is performed, for example, from the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, the jackpot type shown in FIG. The jackpot type buffer value indicating the jackpot type determined in step S245 is read, and, for example, from a round counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as a game control counter setting unit, a round indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started from now on. The count value is read (step S295).

Then, the CPU 103, on the basis of the big hit type buffer value and the round count value read in step S295, forms a special winning opening to be opened in the round game to be started on the upper special variable winning ball device 7A. Either the special winning opening or the lower special winning opening formed in the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is determined (step S296). When the round count value is "3", it is determined to execute the round game in which the lower special winning opening is opened. On the other hand, when the round count value is other than "3", it is determined to execute the round game in which the upper special winning opening is opened. Therefore, when the number of times of executing the round game becomes “3” as the specific number, the round game with the lower special winning opening opened is executed, and the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is advantageous to the player. It becomes a state.

The CPU 103 may set a detection effective switch for effectively detecting a game ball in accordance with the determination of the special winning opening to be opened by the process of step S296. For example, when the round count value is “3”, the lower special winning opening switch 23B is activated in association with the lower special winning opening being opened. On the other hand, when the round count value is other than "3", the upper special winning opening is opened and the detection of the game ball by the upper special winning opening switch 23A is enabled.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special winning opening to be opened determined in step S296 is the lower special winning opening (step S297), and if it is the lower special winning opening (step S297; YES), It is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation area solenoid control code set in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is "0" (step S298). If the value of the probability variation area solenoid control code is "0" (step S298) (S298; YES), the value of the probability variation area solenoid control code is set to "1" which is a value corresponding to the probability variation area control pattern setting processing (S299). The probability variation area solenoid control code is a control flag that specifies the position control of the probability variation area lid using the probability variation area solenoid in the probability variation area solenoid control area, and is "0" when the position control of the probability variation area lid is not performed. Is set to "1", and is set to "1" when the position control of the probability variation region lid is started. When it is determined in step S298 that the value of the probability variation area solenoid control code is not "0" (step S298: NO), the jackpot opening preprocessing is ended. Therefore, according to such processing, even if it is determined to open the lower special winning opening, if the value of the probability variation region solenoid control code is not "0", that is, the previous lower special winning opening is opened. When the probability variation area lid corresponding to the round is being controlled, it is possible to prevent the round in which the lower special winning opening is opened from being started.

In step S297, it is determined that the determined special winning opening to be opened is not the lower special winning opening (step S297; NO), or if the processing of step S299 is completed, the opening pattern of the special winning opening according to the type of big hit. The special winning opening opening pattern table determination process for setting is executed (step S300). According to such a process, when it is determined to open the upper special winning opening, since the value of the probability variation area solenoid control code is not referred to, regardless of whether the probability variation area lid is being controlled, You can start the round to open the upper prize hole.

After performing the process of step S300, a solenoid control process for controlling each solenoid is performed (step S301).

After the process of step S301 is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the big hit open process (step S302).

After executing the process of step S302, the CPU 103 sets the interval time from when the upper special prize opening is closed to when the lower special prize opening is opened, and when the lower special prize opening is closed, the upper special prize is awarded. An interval time setting process for setting an interval time until the mouth is opened is executed (step S303). After executing the processing of step S303, the CPU 103 ends the jackpot opening preprocessing.

FIG. 9-9 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S115 of FIG. 9-3 as the big hit opening process. In the big hit opening process shown in FIG. 9-9, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the winning number count value has reached a predetermined maximum winning determination value (step S341). When the maximum winning determination value is not reached in step S341 (step S341; NO), it is determined whether or not an end code is set in the work table before opening the special winning opening (step S342). When it is determined that the end code is not set (step S342; NO), the electric accessory release pattern process is executed (step S343). The electric accessory opening pattern process is a process of controlling opening/closing of the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening according to the opening/closing pattern indicated by the special winning opening opening pattern table determined in the processing of step S300 of FIG. 9-8. ..

After performing the process of step S343 in FIG. 9-9, it is determined whether the count switch is on by checking the detection signal transmitted from the count switch or the like (step S344). For example, in the process of step S344, the detection signal transmitted from the count switch of the special winning opening of which the opening/closing control is being performed among the upper special winning opening and the lower special winning opening is checked. Then, when the count switch is off (step S344; NO), the big hit opening process is ended. On the other hand, when the count switch is on (step S344; YES), the winning number count value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S345), and then the big hit opening process is ended.

When the winning number count value reaches the maximum winning determination value in step S341 (step S341; YES), for example, the driving of the solenoid corresponding to the special winning opening for which opening/closing control is performed is stopped and the big winning is achieved. Settings are made to close the mouth (step S346). For example, when the special winning opening for which the opening/closing control is performed is the upper special winning opening, the setting of closing the upper special winning opening by stopping the driving of the solenoid 82A for the upper special opening door is performed.

After executing the process of step S346 or when it is determined that the end code is set in the process of step S342 (step S342; YES), the round end command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S347).

Next, the CPU 103 determines, based on the round count value, whether or not the round to be ended is a round for opening the lower special winning opening (step S348). Then, when it is determined that the round is to open the lower special winning opening (step S348; YES), the value of the probability variation region solenoid control code is set to "3" which is a value corresponding to the probability variation region control execution process. (Step S349).

After executing the process of step S350, or when it is determined in the process of step S348 that the round is not the one in which the lower special winning opening is opened (step S348; NO), the value of the special figure process flag is changed to the big hit opening post-process. After updating to the corresponding value "6" (step S352), the big hit opening process is ended.

FIG. 9-10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S116 of FIG. 9-3 as post-big hit opening process. In the big hit opening post-processing shown in FIGS. 9-10, the CPU 103 first updates the interval timer value so that 1 is subtracted (step S361). At this time, it is determined whether or not the updated interval timer value has become "0" (step S362). When the interval timer value is other than "0" (step S362; NO), the jackpot opening post-process is ended.

When the interval timer value is "0" in step S362 (step S362; YES), it is determined whether the round count value has reached the upper limit round count value (step S363). If the round count value is less than the upper limit round count value (step S363; NO), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" which is the value corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (step S364). , After the jackpot opening process is completed. In this way, until the round count value is determined to be the upper limit round count value by the processing of step S363, the processing of steps S115 to S116 of FIG. It is possible to execute a plurality of rounds in which is opened.

When it is determined in step S363 that the round count value is the upper limit round count value (step S363; YES), the ending effect time corresponding to the jackpot type is set (step S366). At this time, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off.

9-11 is a figure which shows an ending time table. Referring to FIG. 9-11, as shown in FIGS. 9-11(A) and 9-11(B), respectively, a big hit occurs in a low base state and a big hit occurs in a high base state. The ending effect time is set in advance according to the type of big hit with respect to the continuous winning time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a big hit end designation command capable of specifying an ending effect time corresponding to the kind of big hit to the effect control board 12 (step S367). .. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7" which is a value corresponding to the big hit ending process (step S368), and the big hit opening post-process is ended. Note that the CPU 103 may count the number of continuation of the time saving state and identify the number of continuation of the time saving state by making it possible to identify by the EXT data of the big hit end designation command or the like.

FIG. 9-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S117 of FIG. 9-3 as the big hit ending process. In the big hit ending process shown in FIG. 9-12, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the ending effect time has elapsed (step S381). As an example, in the processing of step S365 in the jackpot opening post-processing shown in FIG. 9-10, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the ending effect time is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S381, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and it is determined whether the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the ending effect time has elapsed. When the ending effect time has not elapsed in step S381 (step S381; NO), the jackpot ending process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, when the ending effect time has elapsed in step S381 (step S381; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the passage flag is on (step S382). Here, the passage flag is a flag that is set to an ON state when the probability variation area switch 24A detects passage of the game ball into the probability variation area.

When the passage flag is ON in step S382 (step S382; YES), the probability variation control is started to set the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the probability variation state (step S383). As an example, in the process of step S383, in addition to setting the probability variation flag to the on state, a count initial value corresponding to the upper limit number of special figure games that can be executed in the probability variation state is set in the probability variation counter. .. After that, the passage flag is reset to the off state (step S384). In addition, in the process of step S383, a setting for starting the time saving control in which the average variable display time becomes shorter than the normal state may be executed.

After the processing of step S384 is executed, or when the passage flag is not on in the processing of step S382 (step S382; NO), the setting for starting the high base control is performed (step S385). As an example, in the process of step S385, the time saving flag and the advantageous state flag are set to the ON state, and the preset initial count value corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game executable in the time saving state is set. , The special figure variation counter may be set.

After performing the process of step S385, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S386), the big hit ending process is ended.

9-13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In this effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit. .. Of the description of these processes, the same description as that described with reference to FIG. 7 will not be repeated.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In this special figure winning wait process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit start processing. To do. When the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "miss", and the value of the effect process flag is the initial value. Update to "0".

The big hit start process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In the big hit start process, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit game state on the image display device 5 after the end of the variable display time. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the processing during the round.

The in-round process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In the processing during this round, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control during the round. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "6" which is a value corresponding to the post-round processing. If the final round is finished, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "7" which is a value corresponding to the post-end processing of the big hit.

The post-round processing of step S176 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this post-round processing, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control between rounds. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the processing during the round.

The post-big hit completion process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this post-big hit end process, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control in the image display device 5 to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process.

FIG. 9-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the special figure winning waiting process executed in step S173 of FIG. 9-13. In the special symbol winning waiting process shown in FIG. 9-14, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a symbol fixing designation command has been received (step S720). When the symbol confirmation designation command is not received (step S720; NO), the special symbol winning waiting process is ended.

When the symbol fixing designation command is received (step S720; YES), the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the fixed decorative symbol (step S722). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the confirmed decorative design is a jackpot design (step S723). When the fixed decorative design is not the big hit design (step S723: NO), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step S726), and the special design winning wait process. To finish.

When the confirmed decorative design is the big hit design (step S723: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command has been received (step S730). When the hit start designation command is not received (step S730; NO), the special figure hit waiting process is ended.

When the hit start designation command is received (step S730; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the fanfare effect as described later with reference to FIG. 9-17 (step S733A), and the fanfare effect time timer. The value is set (step S733B), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" corresponding to the big hit start process (step S174) (step S734), and the special figure hit waiting process is ended.

FIG. 9-15 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit start process executed in step S174 of FIG. 9-13. In the big hit start process shown in FIG. 9-15, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a special winning opening opening notification command is received (step S741). Here, the special winning opening opening notification command is a command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state.

When the special winning opening open notification command is not received (step S741; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes the fanfare effect execution process shown in FIG. 9-16 (step S742), and ends the big hit start process. .. As an example, in the process of step S742, the value of the process timer is decremented by 1, and the effect device is controlled in accordance with the content of the process data n. For example, in the image display device 5, an effect of displaying a jackpot display pattern and displaying characters or characters indicating that the jackpot has occurred is executed. Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched, and the process data set next in the process table is switched. , Set the process timer set value in the next process data to the process timer and start the process timer.

When the special winning opening opening notification command is received (step S741; YES), the setting for starting the big hit medium effect is performed (step S743). As an example, in the process of step S743, the in-round effect is selected based on the contents of the special winning opening opening notification command, then the process table corresponding to the in-round effect is selected, and the process timer is started.

Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S744), and then the jackpot start processing is ended.

FIG. 9-16 is a flowchart showing an example of fanfare production execution processing. Referring to FIG. 9-16, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the fanfare effect time timer value (step 069FS111). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fanfare effect time timer value has become 0 (step 069FS112).

When it is determined that the fanfare production time timer value is not 0 (NO in step 069FS112), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the start of the fanfare production time (step 069FS113).

When it is determined that it is the start of the fanfare production time (YES in step 069FS113), the effect control CPU 120 selects the notification effect according to the big hit type and the number of consecutive chanting (step 069FS114), and starts the big hit type suggestion display. (Step 069FS115). The notification effect is an effect for notifying the type of effect executed in the big hit round. The jackpot type suggestion display is a display for suggesting the jackpot type.

When it is determined that it is not the start of the fanfare production time (NO in step 069FS113), and after step 069FS115, the production control CPU 120 determines whether it is the start of the notification production (step 069FS121). The start time of the notification effect is predetermined for each fanfare effect time, and for example, when the fanfare effect time is 13 seconds and 20 seconds, the time is 5 seconds and 7 seconds from the start of the fanfare effect time, respectively. Is.

When it is determined that it is the start time of the notification effect (YES in step 069FS121), the effect control CPU 120 starts execution of the notification effect selected based on the jackpot type (step 069FS122).

When it is determined that it is not the time to start the notification effect (NO in step 069FS121) and after step 069FS122, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the started notification effect is the notification effect that accepts the selection by the player. Is determined (step 069FS123). When it is determined that the player's selection is the notification effect (YES in step 069FS123), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the selection acceptable period in the notification effect (step 069FS124).

When it is determined that the selection is acceptable (YES in step 069FS124), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection is accepted (step 069FS125). When it is determined that the selection has been accepted (YES in step 069FS125), the effect control CPU 120 sets the accepted content as the effect content for the jackpot round (step 069FS126).

If it is determined that it is not a notification effect for accepting the player's selection (NO in step 069FS123), it is determined that it is not accepting the selection (NO in step 069FS125) if it is determined that it is not in the selection acceptable period (NO in step 069FS124). In the case, and after step 069FS126, the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to be executed to the calling source of the fanfare effect execution process.

FIG. 9-17 is a timing chart showing an example of a fanfare presentation. Referring to FIG. 9-17, the following is set in the fanfare rendering setting executed in step S733A in FIG. 9-14 described above. When the hit start designation command received in step S730 is a command indicating a 6R normal big hit, in step 733A, as shown in FIG. 9-7, 13 seconds is set as the fanfare effect time, and FIG. ) The effect data is set so that the effect indicated by () is executed.

FIG. 9-17(A) shows a timing chart when it is determined that the 6R normal big hit is decided. First, the jackpot type suggestion display is executed in the first 5 seconds of the fanfare production time. As the jackpot type suggestion display, an image or the like showing that the jackpot type is the 6R normal jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5.

The jackpot type notification effect is executed as the notification effect in 8 seconds from the fifth to the 13th second of the fanfare effect time. The big hit type notification effect is an effect of notifying the confirmed big hit type. From the time when the big hit type suggestion display and the big hit type notification effect are executed, the right-hand hit notification is displayed on the image display device 5 from then on.

When the hit start designation command received in step S730 is a command indicating a 6R probability variation big hit, in step 733A, as shown in FIG. 9-7, 13 seconds is set as the fanfare production time, and FIG. ) Or the effect shown in FIG. 9-17(C) is determined by lottery (for example, it is determined that the effect of FIG. 9-17(B) is executed at a rate of 30%, and 70% of 9-17(C) is determined to be executed, and the effect data is set such that the determined effect is executed.

FIG. 9-17(B) shows a first timing chart when it is determined that the 6R probability variation big hit is determined. First, the jackpot type suggestion display is executed in the first 5 seconds of the fanfare production time. As the jackpot type suggestion display, an image or the like showing that the jackpot type is the 6R normal jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5.

The round promotion effect is executed as the notification effect in 8 seconds from the fifth to the 13th second of the fanfare effect time. The round promotion effect is an effect in which the player is shown to have been promoted from a jackpot having a low advantage to the player to a jackpot having a high advantage to the player. Right hit notification is displayed on the image display device 5 from the time when the big hit type suggestion display and the round promotion effect are executed, and thereafter.

FIG. 9-17(C) shows a second timing chart when it is determined that the 6R probability variation big hit is determined. First, the jackpot type suggestion display is executed in the first 5 seconds of the fanfare production time. As the jackpot type suggestion display, an image or the like indicating that the jackpot type is the 6R probability variation jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5.

The music selection effect is executed as the notification effect in 6 seconds from the fifth to the 11th second of the fanfare effect time. The music selection effect is an effect of selecting the music output during the big hit. The special right-handing notification is executed in 2 seconds from the 11th second to the 13th second of the fanfare production time. The above-mentioned right-handed notification is executed by displaying a small "right-handed" in the upper right part of the image display device 5, whereas the special right-handed notification is displayed in the central part of the image display device 5 by a large right-handed part. It is executed by displaying "Strike". The right hit notification is displayed on the image display device 5 during and after the jackpot type suggestion display, the music selection effect, and the special right hit notification.

When the hit start designation command received in step S730 is a command indicating a 16R probability variable big hit, in step 733A, as shown in FIG. 9-7, 20 seconds is set as the fanfare production time, and FIG. ) The effect data is set so that the effect indicated by () is executed.

FIG. 9-17(D) shows a timing chart when it is determined that the 16R probability variation big hit is determined. First, the jackpot type suggestion display is executed in the first 7 seconds of the fanfare production time. As the jackpot type suggestion display, an image or the like showing that the jackpot type is the 16R probability variation jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5.

In the 13 seconds from the 7th second to the 20th second of the fanfare production time, the music selection production is executed as the notification production. Right hit notification is displayed on the image display device 5 from the time when the jackpot type suggestion display and the music selection effect are executed, and thereafter.

FIG. 9-18 is a screen transition diagram showing the flow of fanfare production. Referring to FIG. 9-18, in the production in the case of 6R probability variation big hit shown in FIG. 9-17(B), as shown in FIG. 9-18(A), as a big hit type suggestion display, 6R normal big hit An image including a character “C big hit” indicating that is displayed on the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 9-18(B) and FIG. 9-18(C), as a result of the round promotion effect being executed, an image including the characters “B jackpot” indicating that it is a 6R certainty variation jackpot. Is displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the effect in the case of the 16R probability variation big hit shown in FIG. 9-17(D), as shown in FIG. 9-18(D), the 16R probability variation big hit is shown as the jackpot type suggestion display. An image including the characters “big hit” is displayed on the image display device 5. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 9-18(E) and 9-18(F), the music selection effect is executed, and as a result of the player's selection being accepted by the operation of the stick controller 31A, the selected jackpot is selected. An image including a character indicating that the music piece inside is “Music piece G” is displayed on the image display device 5.

It should be noted that, in the case of the 16R probability variable jackpot, as shown in FIG. 9-18(E), there are 10 music choices, but in the case of the 6R probability variable jackpot, there are fewer songs. Number (for example, 3 songs). As shown in FIGS. 9-17(C) and (D), the number of music choices for the 16R certainty variation jackpot is larger than that for the 6R certainty variation jackpot, but since the period of the music selection effect is lengthened, the player Can make it difficult to select songs.

In addition, when the big hits are consecutively changed, it is possible to add music options for the 16R probability variation big hit. The number of options in the first hit may be smaller, the same, or larger than the number of options in the 6R certainty variation big hit.

Further, when the selected music piece is output, a video image is also displayed.

FIG. 9-19 is a flowchart showing details of the in-round process executed in step S175 of FIG. 9-13. In the in-round process shown in FIG. 9-19, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a special winning opening open designation command has been received (step S751). When the command after opening the special winning opening has not been received (step S751; NO), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for controlling the effect operation that is a round effect according to the number of rounds (step S752). An ending effect selection second process shown in FIG. 9-20 described later is executed (step S752A). As an example, in the process of step S752, the value of the process timer is decremented by 1, and the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data n. For example, in the image display device 5, an effect of displaying a jackpot display symbol and displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like is executed. Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched, and the process data set next in the process table is switched. , Set the process timer set value in the next process data to the process timer and start the process timer.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot type is the "second jackpot", for example, by reading the EXT data in the jackpot opening notification command transmitted from the main board 11 ( Step S753).

When the big hit type is not the “second big hit” in step S753 (step S753; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the in-round process.

On the other hand, when the big hit type is the “second big hit” in step S753 (step 753; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the probability variation confirmation command is received from the main board 11 (step S754). .. Here, the probability variation confirmation command is a command for notifying that the probability variation region switch 24A is turned on and the probability variation state is confirmed.

When the probability variation confirmation command is received in step S754 (step S754; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the winning effect control (step S755). For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a winning effect indicating that a game ball has won in the probability variation area as the winning effect control setting.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the winning flag indicating that the game ball has won in the probability variation area during the round game to the on state (step S756).

When the probability variation confirmation command is not received in step S754 (step S754; NO), or after the processing of step S756 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting for starting the instruction effect is performed. It is determined whether or not (step S757). Here, the instruction effect is an effect for instructing the player to perform an operation of launching a game ball to the lower special variable winning ball device 7B.

When the setting for starting the instruction effect (instruction effect start setting) is made in step S757 (step S757; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs the instruction effect control setting (step S758). For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes an instruction effect as an instruction effect control setting.

When the setting for starting the instructed effect (instruction effect start setting) is not performed in step S757 (step S757; NO), or after the process of step S758 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 gives the notification effect. It is determined whether or not the setting for starting (notification effect start setting) is made (step S759). Here, the notification effect is an effect for notifying that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area.

When the setting for starting the notification effect (notification effect start setting) is made in step S759 (step S759; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs the notification effect control setting. For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the notification effect as the notification effect control setting.

When the setting for starting the notification effect (notification effect start setting) is not performed in step S759 (step S759; NO), or after executing the processing of step S759, the effect control CPU 120 causes the processing during the round. To finish.

When the command after opening the special winning opening is received in step S751 (step S751; YES), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for starting the interval effect based on the content of the command after opening the special winning opening. Perform (step S761). Here, the interval effect is an effect of performing interval display according to the number of rounds. Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the set interval effect and starts the process timer.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "6" which is the value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S762), and ends the in-round processing.

9-21 is a flowchart showing details of the post-round processing executed in step S176 of FIG. 9-13. In the post-round processing shown in FIG. 9-21, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a hit end designation command has been received (step S771). Here, the hit end designation command is a command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state. When the hit end command has not been received (step S771; NO), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the special winning opening opening notification command has been received (step S772).

When the special winning opening opening notification command is not received (step S772; NO), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for controlling the effect operation that is an interval effect according to the number of rounds (step S773). .. As an example, in the process of step S773, the value of the process timer is decremented by 1, and the effect device is controlled in accordance with the content of the process data n. Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched, and the process data set next in the process table is switched. , Set the process timer set value in the next process data to the process timer and start the process timer.

When the special winning opening opening command is received (step S772; YES), the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for ending the effect operation that is the interval effect according to the number of rounds (step S774). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot type is the "second jackpot", for example, by reading the EXT data in the jackpot opening notification command transmitted from the main board 11 ( Step S775). At this time, if the big hit type is the “second big hit” (step S775; YES), for example, by reading the EXT data in the special winning opening opening notification command transmitted from the main board 11, It is determined whether the number of rounds is 9 (step S776).

When the next round is 9 rounds in step S776 (step S776; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for starting the instruction effect (instruction effect start setting) (step S777). As an example, in the process of step S777, a process table corresponding to the instruction effect is selected and a process timer is started.

On the other hand, when the next round is not 9 rounds in step S776 (step S776; NO), the effect control CPU 120 reads, for example, the EXT data in the special winning opening opening notification command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like. Thus, it is determined whether the next round is 10 rounds (step S778).

When the next round is 10 rounds in step S778 (step S778; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning flag is set to the on state (step S779).

When the winning flag is set to the ON state in step S779 (step S779; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs the setting for starting the notification effect (notification effect start setting) (step S780). As an example, in the process of step S780, the process table corresponding to the notification effect is selected and the process timer is started.

If the jackpot type is not the “second jackpot” in step S775 (step S775; NO), the next round is not 10 rounds in step S778 (step S778; NO), or the winning flag is on in step S779. If not set (step S779; NO), it is determined whether the next round is any of 13R to 16R (step S783).

When the next round is any of 13R to 16R (step S783; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect selection first process shown in FIG. 9-20 described later.

When the next round is none of 13R to 16R (step S783; NO), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for starting an effect operation that is a round effect corresponding to the number of rounds (step S781). As an example, in the process of step S781, the process table corresponding to the performance during the round is selected and the process timer is started.

After executing the process of step S777, the process of step S780, the process of step S781, or the process of step S784, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect process flag. The value is updated to "5", which is the value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S782), and the post-round processing is ended.

When the hit end command is received in the process of step S771 (S771; YES), the ending effect is set as described later with reference to FIG. 9-25 (step S782A), and the ending effect time timer value is set. (Step S782B), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7" which is a value corresponding to the big hit end post-processing (step S781), and the round post-processing is ended.

FIG. 9-20 is a flowchart showing an ending effect selection first process and a second process. Referring to FIG. 9-20, in the ending effect selection first process, first, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the next round is any of 13R to 15R (step 069FS131). When it is determined to be any of 13R to 15R (YES in step 069FS131), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the type of ending effect has not been accepted (step 069FS132).

When it is determined that the selection of the ending effect type has not been received (YES in step 069FS132), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for starting the ending effect selection acceptance display (step 069FS133).

If it is determined that the next round is neither 13R nor 15R (NO in step 069FS131), it is determined that the selection of ending effect is accepted (NO in step 069FS132), and after step 069FS133 The control CPU 120 determines whether or not the next round is 16R (step 069FS134).

When it is determined to be 16R (step 069FS134), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the type of ending effect has not been accepted (step 069FS135). When it is determined that the selection of the ending effect has been accepted (NO in step 069FS135), the setting for starting the effect which notifies the ending effect of the accepted type as the ending effect to be executed is performed (step 069FS136).

When it is determined that the selection of the type of ending effect has not been received (YES in step 069FS135), the effect control CPU 120 starts the effect of notifying the ending effect of the type automatically selected by the lottery as the ending effect to be executed. Is set (step 069FS137).

When it is determined that the next round is not 16R (NO in step 069FS134), after step 069FS136 and after step 069FS137, the effect control CPU 120 returns the processing to be executed to the calling source of this processing.

In the ending effect selection second process, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current round is any of 13R to 15R (step 069FS141). If it is determined to be any of 13R to 15R (YES in step 069FS141), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for controlling the ending effect selection acceptance display (step 069FS142).

When it is determined that the current round is neither 13R nor 15R (NO in step 069FS141), and after step 069FS142, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ending effect selection acceptance display is being displayed. (Step 069FS143). When it is determined that it is being displayed (YES in step 069FS143), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the type of ending effect has been accepted (step 069FS144).

When it is determined that the selection of the type of ending effect is accepted (YES in step 069FS144), the effect control CPU 120 sets the ending effect of the accepted type as the ending effect to be executed (step 069FS145).

When it is determined that the ending effect selection reception display is not being displayed (NO in step 069FS143), selection of the type of ending effect is not accepted (NO in step 069FS144), and after step 069FS145 The control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current round is 16R (step 069FS146). When it is determined to be 16R (YES in step 069FS146), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for controlling the effect that notifies the ending effect to be executed (step 069FS147).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current round is not 16R (NO in step 069FS146) and after step 069FS147, the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to be executed to the calling source of this process.

FIG. 9-22 is a flowchart showing an example of post-big hit completion processing executed in step S177 of FIG. 9-13. In the big hit end post-processing shown in FIG. 9-22, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the ending effect time timer value (step S770), and determines whether or not the ending effect time timer value has become 0 ( Step S771). That is, it is determined whether or not the ending effect time timer has timed out (whether or not the ending effect time has elapsed). When the ending effect time timer value is not 0 (step S771; NO), an ending effect execution process shown in FIG. 9-23 described later is executed (step S772), and the post-big hit process is ended. When the ending effect time timer value becomes 0 (step S771; YES), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step S773), and the big hit ends. The post-processing ends.

FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing an example of ending effect execution processing. With reference to FIG. 9-23, the CPU 120 for effect control subtracts 1 from the ending effect time timer value (step 069FS151). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ending effect time timer value has become 0 (step 069FS152).

When it is determined that the ending effect time timer value is not 0 (NO in step 069FS152), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ending effect time is started (step 069FS153).

When it is determined that it is the start of the ending effect time (YES in step 069FS153), the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the ending effect of the set type. (Step 069FS154).

When it is determined that it is not the start time of the ending effect time (NO in step 069FS153), and after step 069FS154, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the ending effect being executed is an ending effect that accepts the selection by the player. It is determined whether or not (step 069FS156). When it is determined that it is the ending effect that accepts the selection by the player (YES in step 069FS156), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the selection acceptable period in the ending effect (step 069FS157).

When it is determined that it is the selection acceptable period (YES in step 069FS157), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection is accepted (step 069FS158). When it is determined that the selection is accepted (YES in step 069FS158), the effect control CPU 120 sets the accepted content as the effect content after the big hit (step 069FS159).

If it is determined that it is not the ending effect that accepts the player's selection (NO in step 069FS156), it is determined that it is not accepting the selection (NO in step 069FS158) if it is determined that it is not in the selection acceptable period (NO in step 069FS157). In the case, and after step 069FS159, the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to be executed to the calling source of the ending effect execution process.

FIG. 9-24 is a screen transition diagram illustrating a flow of selecting an ending effect type. Referring to FIG. 9-24, in FIG. 9-24(A), the current round number is reached when the jackpot 13 to 15 rounds are executed by executing the processing shown in FIG. 9-20. In addition to the characters that indicate the total number of balls won in the jackpot, an image that includes characters that prompt the player to select the type of effect at the ending, and the type of effect at the ending. An image including the characters of the options is displayed on the image display device 5. When this screen is displayed, the player can select the type of effect at the ending by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. In addition, when the push button 31B is not operated before the selectable period of 15 rounds ends, the type of option in the selected state is selected as the type of effect at the ending.

Next, in FIG. 9-24(A), by performing the processing shown in FIG. 9-20, when the final 16 rounds of the jackpot, the character indicating the current round number and the jackpot are displayed. An image including a character indicating the type of the selected ending effect is displayed on the image display device 5 in addition to the character indicating the total number of the acquired balls.

FIG. 9-25 is a timing chart showing an example of ending effects. Referring to FIG. 9-25, FIG. 9-25(A) shows a case where the ending effect of effect pattern A is executed at the time of first hit. At the time of the first hit, the effect pattern A is automatically selected. The effect pattern A is an ending effect effect pattern for selecting the contents of the effect contents in the early stage, the middle game, and the end game in the high base state after the big hit.

When the big hit round ends and the ending effect time starts, first, an introduction effect indicating that the ending effect starts in 2 seconds from 0 second to 2 seconds is executed. Next, 5 seconds from the second second to the seventh second is a selection period A for selecting the effect content in the early stage of the effect content after the big hit, and the effect of accepting the selection of the effect content in the early stage from the player. Is executed.

Similarly, for 5 seconds from the 7th to 12th seconds and 5 seconds from the 12th to 17th seconds, to select the midfield and the final stage of the production contents after the big hit, respectively. In the selection period B and the selection period C, the effects for accepting the selection of the effect contents in the middle game and the end game from the player are executed.

In the next 3 seconds from the 17th to the 20th, the effect of displaying the result selected in the selection period A to the selection period C is executed. In the 3 seconds from the 20th to the 23rd, the introduction effect indicating that the probability variation mode starts is executed. In the five seconds from the 23rd to the 28th, the image display device 5 displays a caution display including a display for preventing forgetting to take out the prepaid card and a display for preventing the player from being absorbed in the game. The company logo showing the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the image display device 5 in 4 seconds from the 28th to the 32nd. In the final 32 seconds to the 34th second of the ending effect time, the probability variation mode entry effect indicating that the probability variation mode is entered is executed in 2 seconds.

FIG. 9-25(B) shows a case where the ending effect of effect pattern A is executed during continuous chang. At the time of consecutive chanting, the player can select the type of ending effect executed during the ending effect time from the 13th round to the 16th round of a big hit.

When the big hit round ends and the ending effect time starts, first, an introduction effect indicating that the ending effect starts in 2 seconds from 0 second to 2 seconds is executed. Next, 10 seconds from the second second to the 12th second is a selection period A for selecting the early stage effect content from the effect content after the big hit, and the effect of accepting the selection of the early stage effect content from the player Is executed.

Similarly, for the 10 seconds from the 12th to the 22nd seconds and the 10 seconds from the 22nd to the 32nd seconds, to select the midfield and the final stage of the production contents after the big hit, respectively. In the selection period B and the selection period C, the effects for accepting the selection of the effect contents in the middle game and the end game from the player are executed.

In the next 5 seconds from the 32nd to the 37th seconds, the effect of displaying the result selected in the selection period A to the selection period C is executed. In the 5 seconds from the 37th to the 42nd, the introduction effect indicating that the probability variation mode starts is executed. The probability variation mode entry effect that indicates entry into the probability variation mode is executed in the final three seconds from the 42nd to the 45th seconds of the ending effect time.

In the case where the effect pattern E is selected from the effect pattern B, among the ending effects of the effect pattern A shown in FIG. 9-25, the effect of the selection period A to the selection period C and the effect of displaying the selection result are: The effect patterns B to E are changed to different effects. The length of the effect of the part that includes the player's intervention elements included in the effect patterns A to E is different, but the ending effect time is the same as the length at which the big hit symbol is displayed in the probability variation mode entry effect. Is adjusted to.

FIG. 9-26 is a screen transition diagram illustrating the flow of ending effects. With reference to FIG. 9-26, when the effect pattern A is selected, the screen shown in FIG. 9-26(A) is displayed on the image display device 5 in the selection period A. The screen shown in FIG. 9-26(A) includes an image including characters for prompting the selection of the effect contents in the early stage among the effect contents after the big hit and characters indicating options.

After the selection period A, the screens shown in FIGS. 9-26B and 9C are displayed on the image display device 5 in the selection period B and the selection period C, respectively. The screens shown in FIGS. 9-26(B) and (C) each include an image including characters for prompting selection of effect contents in the middle and end of the effect contents after the big hit and characters indicating options. Be done.

During the selection result display period after the selection period C, the screen shown in FIG. 9-26(D) is displayed on the image display device 5. The screen shown in FIG. 9-26(D) includes an image including characters indicating the selection result of the early stage, the middle stage, and the final stage of the effect content after the big hit.

The effect pattern B can be output during a high base state after a big hit, by executing a predetermined game (here, the Amida lottery game) that requires a player's operation (here, selecting an option), and depending on the result of the game. It is a production pattern of ending production that changes the number of songs that can be selected by the player among the various songs. When the effect pattern B is selected, instead of the effect of displaying the selection period A to the selection period C shown in FIG. 9-25 and the effect of displaying the selection result, FIG. 9-26 (E) and FIG. 9-26 (F ), the effect of executing the Amida Lottery game is executed.

On the screen shown in FIG. 9-26(E), an image of the first half of the Amida lottery, characters of the choices at the start point of the Amida lottery, characters prompting the player to select the choices, and characters following the route of the Amida lottery Images are included. After the option is selected by the player and the image of the character starts moving along the route of the Amida lottery from the selected start point, the screen of FIG. 9-26(F) is displayed.

The screen shown in FIG. 9-26(F) includes an image of the second half of the Amida lottery, characters indicating the game result of the Amida lottery goal point, and an image of the character who has reached the goal point by following the Amida lottery route. .. Depending on the result of the game, the number of songs that the player can select among the songs that can be output during the high base state after the big hit is changed. For example, as a result of the Amida Lottery game, when the goal point of "add two songs" is reached, two songs are added to the number of songs that the player can select. When the player has reached the “out of bounds” goal point, the number of songs that the player can select is maintained as is.

The total number of songs that can be output during the high base state, which is prestored in the pachinko gaming machine 1, is 10. Two songs can be selected at the first hit. After that, as a result of the effect pattern B being selected in the ending effect period of the jackpot of consecutive chans, the number of pieces of music indicated by the result of the executed game is added. When the number of selectable music pieces reaches the total number of music pieces (here, 10 music pieces), the effect pattern B cannot be selected. After the effect pattern B becomes unselectable, an effect pattern E described later can be selected instead of the effect pattern B.

For the effect pattern C, a predetermined game (here, a trump game) that requires a player's operation (here, selection of an option) is executed, and the ending suggesting the set value shown in the modified example is indicated by the result of the game. It is a production pattern of production. Details regarding the setting values will be described in modification examples regarding the setting shown in FIG. As shown in the modified example of setting, it is configured to be able to set to one of the set values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and it is possible to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value In the case of the above configuration, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on the set value. Since the player expects to be controlled in an advantageous state, by executing an ending effect that suggests a set value, the player can be made to pay attention to the ending effect. When the effect pattern C is selected, instead of the effect for displaying the effect and the selection result of the selection period A to the selection period C shown in FIG. 9-25, FIG. 9-26(G) and FIG. 9-26(H ), the effect of executing the card game is executed.

The screen shown in FIG. 9-26(G) includes an image of playing card choices, and characters prompting the player to select the choices. After the option is selected by the player and the operation of turning over the selected playing card is executed, the screen of FIG. 9-26(H) is displayed.

The screen shown in FIG. 9-26(H) includes an image of the options of the non-selected playing card and an image of the playing card in which the image of the contents selected and turned over to suggest the setting value is drawn. .. The setting value is suggested according to the content of the image of the playing card (for example, content of character, type of character). For example, in the case of the character “may be set”, it is suggested that the set value is likely to be a high set value. In addition, it is indicated that the set value is likely to be a high set value in the case of a specific type of character. It should be noted that the effect pattern C cannot be selected during a continuous change when the setting suggestion is executed.

The effect pattern D is a mini game that requires a player's operation, which indicates whether or not there is a pending storage that is determined to be a big hit among the currently stored pending memories (so-called continuous holding). It is a production pattern of an ending production that executes production. When the effect pattern D is selected, the effect of executing the mini game of the effect pattern D is executed instead of the effect of displaying the selection period C and the effect of the selection period C shown in FIG. 9-25. ..

The effect pattern E is a selection pattern that can be selected after all songs can be selected in the effect pattern B, or after the number of consecutive chan reaches a specific number (for example, 15 times), and is operated by the player. This is an ending effect production pattern in which an image that is not normally displayed (for example, a premium image) is displayed when the game is successful as a result of executing a required predetermined mini game. As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-24, the option of the effect pattern E is displayed in the unselectable state, but is displayed in a mode indicating that it is not selectable, and is in the selectable state. After that, it is displayed in a mode showing that it is selectable.

(Regarding a modified example of the characteristic part 069F)
(1) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-19 to FIG. 9-25, the type of ending effect is before the ending effect during the big hit (for example, 13 rounds to 16 rounds). It was selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of ending effect may be selected during the ending effect.

FIG. 9-27 is a timing chart showing an example of ending effects in the modified example. Referring to FIG. 9-27, in the above-described embodiment, the effect for selecting the effect pattern of the ending effect, which is executed before the ending effect during the big hit, is 0 second of the ending effect time. To 10 seconds from 10 to 10 seconds. The effect to be executed thereafter is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 9-25(B).

(2) In this way, in the first half period of the ending effect, the type of the effect executed in the latter half period may be selected as the related effect related to the effect executed in the latter half period.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the related effect, an explanation effect (for example, a description of how to play) of an effect (for example, a mini game effect) that is executed in the latter half period may be executed. You may make it perform the introduction production of the production performed by. Further, in this case, the shorter ending effect time may have only the latter half period without the first half period.

Further, in this case, when the same effect pattern is repeatedly selected in a series of big hits, the first half period may be shortened and the second half period may be lengthened. Further, the first half period may be shortened, the second half period may be the same length, and the effect for time adjustment may be executed in the remaining period. This makes it possible to give the illusion that the ending period has been shortened.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-5(B), step S269 of FIG. 9-6, step S270, and FIG. A longer time is selected as the fanfare production time than the probability variation big hit or the 6R regular big hit. In addition, the jackpot of consecutive chan is selected to have a long time as a fanfare production time at a higher rate than the jackpot of the first hit. Further, the long time as a fanfare production time is higher in the case of being controlled as a big hit as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol than in the case of being controlled as a big hit as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol. I chose to select.

However, as described above, if the fanfare production time is determined, it may be determined by another method. Here, in the former case, a long time is selected as the fanfare production time at a rate of 0%, and in the latter case, a long time is selected as the fanfare production time at a rate of 100%. However, the ratio is not limited to the above and may be any other ratio as long as the latter ratio is higher than the former ratio.

(4) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 9-5(B), step S366 in FIG. 9-10, step S367, and FIG. A longer time is selected as the ending effect time at a higher rate than the probability variation big hit or the 6R regular big hit. In addition, rather than the big hit at the first hit, the long win of the consecutive chan is selected at a high ratio as the ending effect time. In addition, a long time as the ending effect time is higher in the case where the big hit is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol than in the big hit as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol. I chose to select.

However, as described above, if the ending effect time is determined, it may be determined by another method. Here, in the former case, a long time is selected as the ending effect time at a rate of 0%, and in the latter case, a long time is selected as the ending effect time at a rate of 100%. However, the ratio is not limited to the above and may be any other ratio as long as the latter ratio is higher than the former ratio.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, the effect patterns A to E of the ending effect include the intervention elements of the player (for example, effects that cause the player to operate the operation unit). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the effect patterns may not include the player's intervention element. For example, the effect pattern E is an effect pattern that does not include a mini game that requires a player's operation, and is an ending effect in which an image that is not normally displayed (for example, a premium image) is displayed without the player's operation. It may be a production pattern.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, there is no limit to the number of continuous probability variation states. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a limit may be set so that the number of continuous probability change states is the predetermined limit number. In this case, the effect pattern of the ending effect may include an effect pattern including a mini game effect that indicates the remaining number of times of the probability variation state up to the predetermined limit number.

(7) The effect in the high base state after the big hit may be a common effect in which it is difficult or impossible to determine whether the state is the probable variation state or the non-probability variation state. In this case, the ending effect production pattern may include a production pattern including a mini game production that suggests whether or not the probability change state will occur after a big hit.

(8) At the start of the ending effect time, the movable body 32 may be operated to perform an effect of appealing to the player the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit, and then the ending effect described above may be executed. .. As a result, the ending effect can be lengthened by the operation period of the movable body 32.

(9) In a special big hit (for example, a big hit when the number of consecutive chan has reached 20 times), a special video may be displayed without executing the ending effect described above. This special video may be displayed from the start of the big fanfare production period, may be displayed after the end of the fanfare production period, or may be displayed from the start of the ending production period. You may In this way, the ending effect described above may not be executed when a special condition is satisfied.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the ending effect time is the same for the 6R normal big hit and the 6R probability variation big hit, and as shown in FIG. 9-25. , The ending production with the same time allocation is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the 6R normal big hit, the selection period of the effect after the big hit may not be provided, and the ending effect time may be shorter than the 6R sure variation big hit.

(11) In FIGS. 9-26(A) to (C), the options of the effect contents after the big hit are shown. With regard to this option, the 16R certainty variation jackpot may have more options than the 6R certainty variation jackpot. Further, as the number of consecutive chan is increased, the number of options may be increased. As shown in FIG. 9-25, at the time of 16R probability variation big hit or during continuous chan, the selection period A to the selection period C are lengthened, so even if there are many choices, the player can choose from the choices after the big hit. It becomes easy to select the effect contents.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Characteristic Section 069F)
(1-1-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The end effect selecting unit that selects a longer period in the first advantageous state as a finish effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state at a higher rate than in the second advantageous state ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S366 of FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11),
End effect production means capable of executing end effect (for example, ending effect) during the end effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26). With and
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect capable of accepting from the player a selection of an end time effect executed by the end time effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end time effect period in the first advantageous state. Receiving means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step in FIG. 9-20, step in FIG. 9-21. S784: The period in which the selection can be accepted may be the first half of the end effect period or the second half of the jackpot round. Specifically, in the 16R jackpot, a 13R start command is received. It may be a period from when the completion command of 16R is received to when the completion command of 16R is received.).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-1-2) It is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a probability change state, a time saving state, a high state). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a base state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Normal state (for example, normal state), the special state, the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit), and a second disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of an advantageous state (for example, 6 rounds of big hits, a normal big hit),
The case where the advantageous state is controlled when the special state is controlled, rather than the case where the advantageous state is controlled when the normal state is controlled (for example, a so-called first hit big hit) (For example, in the case of a so-called consecutive jackpot), an end time effect selecting means (for example, an end effect selecting means for selecting a long period at a high rate as an end effect time period at the end of the advantageous state (for example, ending effect time)). The game control microcomputer 100, step S366 of FIG. 9-10, and FIG. 9-11),
End effect production means capable of executing end effect (for example, ending effect) during the end effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26). With and
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Receiving means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step in FIG. 9-20, step in FIG. 9-21. S784.) is further provided.

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-1-3) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as the special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, it is possible to execute a variable display of the second special symbol), it is possible to control an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and a special state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a probability changing state, a time saving state, a high base state,
First reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage);
Second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage),
When the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are both stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, see FIG. 9-4) to be executed with priority over the display,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information, rather than when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. End effect selecting means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-) that selects a long period at a high rate as an end effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of 11),
End effect production means capable of executing end effect (for example, ending effect) during the end effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26). With and
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Receiving means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step in FIG. 9-20, step in FIG. 9-21. S784.) is further provided.

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-2-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The end advantageous effect selecting means (for example, a game control microcomputer, which selects a long period in which the first advantageous state is longer than the second advantageous state as the end effect period at the end of the advantageous state at a high rate. 100, step S366 of FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11),
End effect production means capable of executing end effect during the end effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26),
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
All of the plurality of types of end effects that can be executed in the end effect period of the first advantageous state include player intervention elements (for example, operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) (for example, effect patterns. All of A to effect pattern E are effect modes that accept the operation of the player).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Moreover, the player's intervention element is included in the finish production performed in the finish production period longer than the reference period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-2-2) It is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a probable variation state, a time saving state, a high state). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a base state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
It is possible to control to at least one of a normal state (for example, a normal state), the special state, the advantageous state, a first advantageous state, and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100),
The case where the advantageous state is controlled when the special state is controlled, rather than the case where the advantageous state is controlled when the normal state is controlled (for example, a so-called first hit big hit) The end effect selecting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, which selects a long period at a high rate as the end effect period at the end of the advantageous state) (for example, in the case of a so-called consecutive jackpot) 9-10, step S366 of FIG. 9-10,
End effect production means capable of executing end effect during the end effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26),
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
All of the plurality of types of end effects that can be executed in the end effect period of the first advantageous state include player intervention elements (for example, operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) (for example, effect patterns. All of A to effect pattern E are effect modes that accept the operation of the player).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Moreover, the player's intervention element is included in the finish production performed in the finish production period longer than the reference period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-2-3) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, it is possible to execute a variable display of the second special symbol), it is possible to control an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and a special state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a probability changing state, a time saving state, a high base state,
First reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage);
Second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage),
When the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are both stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B) to be executed with priority over the display,
As the advantageous state, a game state control means capable of controlling at least one of a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). When,
The advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information, rather than when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. End effect selecting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11) that selects a long period at a high rate as the end effect period at the end of FIG.
End effect production means capable of executing end effect during the end effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26),
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
All of the plurality of types of end effects that can be executed in the end effect period of the first advantageous state include player intervention elements (for example, operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) (for example, effect patterns. All of A to effect pattern E are effect modes that accept the operation of the player).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Moreover, the player's intervention element is included in the finish production performed in the finish production period longer than the reference period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-3-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The end advantageous effect selecting means (for example, a game control microcomputer, which selects a long period in which the first advantageous state is longer than the second advantageous state as the end effect period at the end of the advantageous state at a high rate. 100, step S366 of FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11),
An end time effect executing means capable of executing an end time effect during the end time effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 9-22, and FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26);
During the selection effect period after the end effect period has been selected, in the end effect period, a selection of the effect contents from a plurality of types of effect contents is received from the player. Means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step 069FS156 to step 069FS159 in FIG. 9-23).
The selection period of the ending production period of the first advantageous state is longer than the selection period of the ending production period of the second advantageous state (for example, 6R as shown in FIG. 9-25). 16R probability variation jackpot is longer than the probability variation jackpot, the production selection period after the jackpot is longer.)

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, by lengthening the selection period of the effect contents after the end effect period, it is easier to recognize the effect contents, but it is difficult to give the player a feeling of delay due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state. can do.

(1-3-2) It is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a probable variation state, a time saving state, a high state). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a base state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
It is possible to control at least one of a normal state (for example, a normal state), the special state, the advantageous state, a first advantageous state, and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100),
The case where the advantageous state is controlled when the special state is controlled, rather than the case where the advantageous state is controlled when the normal state is controlled (for example, a so-called first hit big hit) The end effect selecting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, which selects a long period at a high rate as the end effect period at the end of the advantageous state) (for example, in the case of a so-called consecutive jackpot) 9-10, step S366 of FIG. 9-10,
An end time effect executing means capable of executing an end time effect during the end time effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 9-22, and FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26);
During the selection effect period after the end effect period has been selected, in the end effect period, a selection of the effect contents from a plurality of types of effect contents is received from the player. Means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step 069FS156 to step 069FS159 in FIG. 9-23).
The selection period of the ending production period of the first advantageous state is longer than the selection period of the ending production period of the second advantageous state (for example, 6R as shown in FIG. 9-25). 16R probability variation jackpot is longer than the probability variation jackpot, the production selection period after the jackpot is longer.)

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, by lengthening the selection period of the effect contents after the end effect period, it is easier to recognize the effect contents, but it is difficult to give the player a feeling of delay due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state. can do.

(1-3-3) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as the special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, it is possible to execute a variable display of the second special symbol), it is possible to control an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and a special state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a probability changing state, a time saving state, a high base state,
First reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage);
Second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage),
When the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are both stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B) to be executed with priority over the display,
As the advantageous state, a game state control means capable of controlling at least one of a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). When,
The advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information, rather than when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. End effect selecting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11) that selects a long period at a high rate as the end effect period at the end of FIG.
An end time effect executing means capable of executing an end time effect during the end time effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 9-22, and FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26);
During the selection effect period after the end effect period has been selected, in the end effect period, a selection of the effect contents from a plurality of types of effect contents is received from the player. Means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step 069FS156 to step 069FS159 in FIG. 9-23).
The selection period of the ending production period of the first advantageous state is longer than the selection period of the ending production period of the second advantageous state (for example, 6R as shown in FIG. 9-25). 16R probability variation jackpot is longer than the probability variation jackpot, the production selection period after the jackpot is longer.)

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, by lengthening the selection period of the effect contents after the end effect period, it is easier to recognize the effect contents, but it is difficult to give the player a feeling of delay due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state. can do.

(1-4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-3-3) above,
An operation detecting means for detecting an operation by the player (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, step 069FS158 of FIG. 9-23) is further provided,
The end time effect executing means executes an effect as an intervention element in an effect mode that requires detection of a motion by the motion detecting means during an execution period, when executing any of a plurality of kinds of end time effects ( For example, all of the effect patterns A to E are effect modes in which the operation of the player is accepted.

According to such a configuration, since there is an intervention element by the player, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of extension.

(1-5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-3-3) above,
An operation detecting means for detecting an operation by the player (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, step 069FS158 of FIG. 9-23) is further provided,
As the intervention element, the end-time effect executing means executes the end-time effect in one of an effect mode that requires detection of an operation by the operation detecting means during an execution period and an effect mode that does not require detection (for example, Any of the effect patterns A to E may be an effect mode in which the player's operation is not accepted).

According to such a configuration, since there is an intervention element by the player, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of extension.

(1-6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-5) above,
(The end time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state, )
(An end-time effect executed by the end-time effect execution means from among a plurality of types of end-time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) that can be executed in the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state. End effect receiving means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting may be used. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, FIG. 9-20, further including step S784 of FIG. 9-21.),)
A plurality of types of end effects are selected by the end effect reception means a predetermined number of times (for example, once or a plurality of times) until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a so-called continuous channel). (While still ending), it includes an end-time production in which selection cannot be accepted (for example, production pattern B is not selectable during continuous chanting when all songs are released). ..

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(1-7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-5) above,
(The end time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state, )
(End-time production reception that receives from the player a selection of an end-time production executed by the end-time production execution means from among a plurality of types of end-time productions that can be executed in the end production period of the first advantageous state. Means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step S784 in FIG. 9-20, and step S784 in FIG. 9-21. .) is further provided,)
For a plurality of types of end effects, when the effect result is a specific result (for example, success), the selection is not accepted until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until so-called consecutive chan ends). It includes an end effect that is disabled (for example, when the setting suggestion is executed, the effect pattern C is not selectable during continuous chanting).

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(1-8) In the gaming machine of (1-6) or (1-7) above,
(The end time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state, )
(End-time production reception that receives from the player a selection of an end-time production executed by the end-time production execution means from among a plurality of types of end-time productions that can be executed in the end production period of the first advantageous state. Means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step S784 in FIG. 9-20, and step S784 in FIG. 9-21. .) is further provided,)
The plurality of types of end-time effects include end-time effects that allow new selections instead of end-time effects that make it impossible to accept selections (for example, effect pattern E is effect pattern B or When the effect pattern C is not selectable, it is made selectable).

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(1-9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-8) above,
(The end time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state, )
(End-time production reception that receives from the player a selection of an end-time production executed by the end-time production execution means from among a plurality of types of end-time productions that can be executed in the end production period of the first advantageous state. Means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step S784 in FIG. 9-20, and step S784 in FIG. 9-21. .) is further provided,)
It is possible to accept the selection of a plurality of types of end effects, based on the fact that a release condition (for example, a condition that another effect pattern cannot be selected, a condition that a continuous change has been completed) is satisfied. Includes end effects. It should be noted that before or during the selection period in which the selection of the end effect can be accepted is started or during the selection period, the player performs a special operation (for example, a back button operation or command input, specifically, a cross). The release condition may be established according to the operation of the keys in a predetermined order, the continuous push of the push button, the input of the password, etc.).

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(1-10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-9) above,
(The end effect production means can execute any of a plurality of types of end effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E).)
Further comprising setting means (for example, refer to FIG. 10-1 to FIG. 12-3) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player,
The plurality of types of end-time effects include effects that suggest the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-26(H), the effect pattern C suggests a set value). It is a production.)

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(1-11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-10) above,
(The end effect production means can execute any of a plurality of types of end effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E).)
The plurality of types of end effects include end effects having different lengths (for example, effect patterns A to effect patterns E have different lengths),
After the execution of the end production is completed, the next variable is changed so that the period from the execution of the end production by the end production execution means to the start of the next variable display is the same. The period adjustment effect until the display is started is executed (for example, the ending effect period is longer than the effect patterns A to E, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the extra time).

According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to adjust the period from the start of execution of the ending effect to the start of the next variable display, and the game control can be easily executed.

(1-12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-11) above,
The ending production period includes at least a first period and a second period after the first period has elapsed,
In the first period, a related effect (for example, introduction effect, explanation effect, effect mode selection effect) related to the effect executed in the second period is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-27, ending. An effect pattern selection period for selecting an effect pattern to be executed thereafter may be provided during the effect time.)

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(2-1-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
In the first advantageous state, at the time of starting the effect state at the start of the advantageous state, the start effect selecting unit (at a higher rate) selects a long period as a start effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at the start of the advantageous state ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S269 of FIG. 9-6, FIG. 9-7),
In a notification period (for example, a notification effect period) that is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state intermediate effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the start effect period ends. Of these, notification effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 of FIG. 9-16) capable of executing notification effect for informing the type of effectable effect during the advantageous state,
It is an advantage state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting, which is capable of accepting the selection of the effect state in the advantageous state from a plurality of types from the player. 9-16, step 069FS123 to step 069FS126.),
The notification period in the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period in the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the 16R certainty variation big hit is more informative than the 6R certainty variation big hit. For a long time),
The notification effect executing means,
In the notification period of the second advantageous state, the player notifies the type of the effect during the advantageous state that can be executed after the end of the start-time effect period in a manner that the player cannot select (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17). In the case of 6R normal big hit, and in the case of promotion from 6R normal big hit to 6R probability variation big hit, the notification effect is executed in a mode that the player cannot select.),
In the notification period of the first advantageous state, the player notifies in a manner that the player can select which of the advantageous state productions should be executed after the end of the start production period (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17). In the case of the 6R certainty variation big hit and the 16R certainty variation big hit, the notification effect for notifying the selected song is executed by the selection of which big hit song to output. ).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-1-2) It is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a probable variation state, a time saving state, a high state). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a base state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Normal state (for example, normal state), the special state, the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit), and a second disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of an advantageous state (for example, 6 rounds of big hits, a normal big hit),
The case where the advantageous state is controlled when the special state is controlled, rather than the case where the advantageous state is controlled when the normal state is controlled (for example, a so-called first hit big hit) (For example, in the case of a so-called consecutive jackpot), a start effect selecting unit (for example, a start effect selecting unit that selects a long period as a start effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at the start of the advantageous state at a high rate (for example, The game control microcomputer 100, step S269 in FIG. 9-6, and FIG. 9-7),
In a notification period (for example, a notification effect period) that is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state intermediate effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the start effect period ends. Of these, notification effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 of FIG. 9-16) capable of executing notification effect for informing the type of effectable effect during the advantageous state,
It is an advantage state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting, which is capable of accepting the selection of the effect state in the advantageous state from a plurality of types from the player. 9-16, step 069FS123 to step 069FS126.),
The notification period in the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period in the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the 16R certainty variation big hit is more informative than the 6R certainty variation big hit. For a long time),
The notification effect executing means,
In the notification period of the second advantageous state, the player notifies the type of the effect during the advantageous state that can be executed after the end of the start-time effect period in a manner that the player cannot select (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17). In the case of 6R normal big hit, and in the case of promotion from 6R normal big hit to 6R probability variation big hit, the notification effect is executed in a mode that the player cannot select.),
In the notification period of the first advantageous state, the player notifies in a manner that the player can select which of the advantageous state productions should be executed after the end of the start production period (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17). In the case of the 6R certainty variation big hit and the 16R certainty variation big hit, the notification effect for notifying the selected song is executed by the selection of which big hit song to output. ).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-1-3) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, it is possible to execute a variable display of the second special symbol), it is possible to control an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and a special state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a probability changing state, a time saving state, a high base state,
First reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage);
Second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage),
When the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are both stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, see FIG. 9-4) to be executed with priority over the display,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second suspended storage information, rather than when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first suspended storage information. Start production selection means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S269 in FIG. 9-6, FIG. 9-) that selects a long period at a high rate as a start production period (for example, fanfare production time) at the start of 7),
In a notification period (for example, a notification effect period) that is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state intermediate effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the start effect period ends. Of these, notification effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 of FIG. 9-16) capable of executing notification effect for informing the type of effectable effect during the advantageous state,
It is an advantage state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting, which is capable of accepting the selection of the effect state in the advantageous state from a plurality of types from the player. 9-16, step 069FS123 to step 069FS126.),
The notification period in the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period in the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the 16R certainty variation big hit is more informative than the 6R certainty variation big hit. For a long time),
The notification effect executing means,
In the notification period of the second advantageous state, the player notifies the type of the effect during the advantageous state that can be executed after the end of the start-time effect period in a manner that the player cannot select (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17). In the case of 6R normal big hit, and in the case of promotion from 6R normal big hit to 6R probability variation big hit, the notification effect is executed in a mode that the player cannot select.),
In the notification period of the first advantageous state, the player notifies in a manner that the player can select which of the advantageous state productions should be executed after the end of the start production period (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17). In the case of the 6R certainty variation big hit and the 16R certainty variation big hit, the notification effect for notifying the selected song is executed by the selection of which big hit song to output. ).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-2-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
In the first advantageous state, at the time of starting the effect state at the start of the advantageous state, the start effect selecting unit (at a higher rate) selects a long period as a start effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at the start of the advantageous state ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S269 of FIG. 9-6, FIG. 9-7),
In a notification period (for example, a notification effect period) that is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state intermediate effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the start effect period ends. Of these, notification effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 of FIG. 9-16) capable of executing notification effect for informing the type of effectable effect during the advantageous state,
It is an advantage state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting, which is capable of accepting the selection of the effect state in the advantageous state from a plurality of types from the player. 9-16, step 069FS123 to step 069FS126.),
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the 16R certainty variation big hit is more informative than the 6R certainty variation big hit. Is a long period of time).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-2-2) It is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, probability variation state, time saving state, high state). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a base state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Normal state (for example, normal state), the special state, the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit), and a second disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of an advantageous state (for example, 6 rounds of big hits, a normal big hit),
The case where the advantageous state is controlled when the special state is controlled, rather than the case where the advantageous state is controlled when the normal state is controlled (for example, a so-called first hit big hit) (For example, in the case of a so-called consecutive jackpot), a start effect selecting unit (for example, a start effect selecting unit that selects a long period as a start effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at the start of the advantageous state at a high rate (for example, The game control microcomputer 100, step S269 in FIG. 9-6, and FIG. 9-7),
In a notification period (for example, a notification effect period) that is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state intermediate effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the start effect period ends. Of these, notification effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 of FIG. 9-16) capable of executing notification effect for informing the type of effectable effect during the advantageous state,
It is an advantage state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting, which is capable of accepting the selection of the effect state in the advantageous state from a plurality of types from the player. 9-16, step 069FS123 to step 069FS126.),
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the 16R certainty variation big hit is more informative than the 6R certainty variation big hit. Is a long period of time).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-2-3) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, it is possible to execute a variable display of the second special symbol), it is possible to control an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and a special state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a probability changing state, a time saving state, a high base state,
First reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage);
Second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage),
When the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are both stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, see FIG. 9-4) to be executed with priority over the display,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second suspended storage information, rather than when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first suspended storage information. Start production selection means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S269 in FIG. 9-6, FIG. 9-) that selects a long period at a high rate as a start production period (for example, fanfare production time) at the start of 7),
In a notification period (for example, a notification effect period) that is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state intermediate effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the start effect period ends. Of these, notification effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 of FIG. 9-16) capable of executing notification effect for informing the type of effectable effect during the advantageous state,
It is an advantage state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting, which is capable of accepting the selection of the effect state in the advantageous state from a plurality of types from the player. 9-16, step 069FS123 to step 069FS126.),
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the 16R certainty variation big hit is more informative than the 6R certainty variation big hit. Is a long period of time).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-1-1) to (2-2-3) above,
The first advantageous state has a larger number of types of effects during the advantageous state that can be executed than the second advantageous state (for example, in the 6R normal big hit, it is possible to output the song at the time of the big hit from three songs And, in the 16R probability variation jackpot, you can select the song at the time of jackpot from 10 songs).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-1-1) to (2-4) above,
In the first advantageous state, based on the increase in the number of times that the advantageous state is continuously controlled (for example, the so-called consecutive chan number) while being controlled to the special state, in the first advantageous state, by the advantageous state effect reception means. There are many types of effects during the advantageous state that can accept the selection (for example, selectable jackpot songs are added to each consecutive chan).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-1-1) to (2-5) above,
As the first advantageous state, there are a 1A advantageous state (for example, 16 round certainty variation big hit) and a 1B advantageous state (eg, 6 round certainty variation big hit) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the 1A advantageous state,
The notification period of the 1A advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the 1B advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the 16R probability variation big hit is more informative than the 6R probability variation big hit. The period is long.).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-1-1) to (2-6) above,
The notification effect execution means, as the notification effect,
In the second advantageous state, as the effect during the advantageous state, the type of effect for informing whether or not the advantageous state is advantageous is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, a big hit type). The notification effect and round promotion effect are executed as the notification effect.) On the other hand,
In the first advantageous state, the notification of the type of music that can be output as the effect during the advantageous state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the music selection effect is executed as the notification effect).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-1-1) to (2-7) above,
The start time effect period includes an advantageous state type suggestion period (for example, a jackpot type suggestion display period shown in FIG. 9-17) for executing an effect suggesting the type of the advantageous state,
The advantageous state type suggestion period of the first advantageous state is longer than the advantageous state type suggestion period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, 16R probability variation big hit, Bigger jackpot type suggestion period is longer than other big jackpots.)

With such a configuration, the player is informed of the advantageous state that is more advantageous for the player for a longer period. Therefore, the player can be pleased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modifications regarding settings]
The characteristic unit 207SG shown below is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and it is possible to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set setting value. The configuration related to the configuration can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, problems may occur from the following viewpoints. BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, the fact that the setting state is set is informed only on the liquid crystal screen, so that it is not possible to appropriately inform the setting state. There was a problem. A gaming machine according to invention 207SG that solves such a problem is proposed below. Further, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that it is not possible to appropriately leave the occurrence of a predetermined error in the setting state. A gaming machine according to the invention 208SG that solves such a problem is proposed below. Furthermore, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with an information display means capable of displaying predetermined information relating to a given gaming value, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a display unit for confirming the set value and an information display unit are provided. However, there is a problem that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced if each is separately provided. A gaming machine according to the invention 209SG which solves such a problem is proposed below. In the following, the features of the gaming machines according to the invention 207SG, the invention 208SG, and the invention 209SG will be represented as a characteristic portion 207SG. The characteristic part 207SG is applicable to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to change the jackpot winning probability according to the set value by a setting change operation by a person on the game hall side (a clerk at the game hall, etc.) using operation means such as a predetermined switch. .. For example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a setting change process is executed that allows the jackpot winning probability set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be changed in response to a setting change operation. Thereby, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table according to the set value, the setting change process that allows the jackpot winning probability to be changed is executed. The set value is composed of, for example, 6 stages (a plurality of stages) of 1 to 6, and the winning probability of the jackpot is the winning probability in the order of the set value 1<the set value 2<the set value 3<the set value 4<the set value 5<the set value 6. Get higher That is, when the set value 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and the advantage gradually increases in the order of the set value 2 to the set value 6. It should be noted that the set value is not limited to six levels as long as it has a plurality of levels. In this way, since the rate of ball output (number of balls per unit time (number of prize balls)) changes according to the fact that the winning probability of the jackpot can be changed, changing the set value changes the ball output rate. It can be said that

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability changes according to the selection of the set value by the setting changing operation at the time of turning on the power. Of the six setting values, for example, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6 are called high setting, which has a high probability of winning the big hit. For example, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 are the big hit values. It is sometimes called a low setting with a low winning probability.

Also, the winning probability of the small hit may be changeable by setting the set value 1 to the set value 6, like the winning probability of the big hit. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the probability variation control is executed, when changing the setting of the jackpot winning probability, both the jackpot winning probability in the low probability state and the jackpot winning probability in the high probability state are set. The values 1 to 6 may be changed (for example, both jackpot winning probabilities may be set value 1<set value 2<set value 3<set value 4<set value 5<set value 6). ..

Also, the selection probability of the type of jackpot may be changeable by setting the setting values 1 to 6 like the winning probability of the jackpot. The selection probability of the variation pattern type may also be changeable by setting the setting values 1 to 6 like the winning probability of the big hit. The selection probability of the variation pattern may also be changeable by setting the setting values 1 to 6 like the winning probability of the big hit.

FIG. 10-1 is a flowchart showing the setting value change processing (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the setting value changing process, the CPU 103 first starts the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device (207SGSa051), the right-handed lamp and the first hold indicator, the second The hold indicator starts blinking (207SGSa052). Further, the CPU 103 starts the lighting of only one of the segments constituting the round display as a mode (a mode that is neither big hit A, big hit B nor big hit C) according to the setting value change processing (207SGSa052a). ).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether or not any value 1 to 6 is stored as the setting value in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a). ). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in 207SGSa020), the set value in the RAM 102 is “1”. Is set (the set value is reset to "1"), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any one of the values 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056). If the power-off detection process execution start waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056 are repeatedly executed, and if the timer has expired (207SGSa056; Y), the power-off detection process is executed. (207 SGSa057).

After the power-off detection processing is executed, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the RAM 102 on the display monitor (207SGSa058), and manages the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (207SGSa061) and determines whether or not the setting switch has been operated (207SGSa062). When the setting change switch is not operated (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065, and when it is (207SGSa062; Y), the contents of the RAM 102 are updated based on the operation of the setting change switch (207SGSa063).

Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor is "1", the RAM 102 is set to "2", which is a set value that is one step more advantageous to the player than "1", as a temporary set value. If the set value stored in the display monitor is “2”, the set value “3”, which is one step more advantageous to the player than “2”, is stored in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value. For example, a value larger than the set value displayed on the display monitor is stored in the RAM 102 as a borrowing setting. When the set value displayed on the display monitor is "6", "1" may be stored in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the setting value (temporary setting value) stored in the RAM 102 on the display monitor (207SGSa064) and determines whether the lock switch is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new temporary setting value in the RAM 102, or the setting value stored in the RAM 102. Execute the processing to display on the display monitor.

When the lock switch is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and ends the display of the setting value (or the provisional setting value) on the display monitor. However, (207SGSa067), all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device are turned off (207SGSa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the first hold indicator and the second hold indicator, and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether a temporary setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If the temporary setting value is not stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069;N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and if it is stored (207SGSa069;Y), the value of the setting value further stored in the RAM 102 and the RAM 102 are stored. It is determined whether or not the value of the provisional set value is different (207SGSa070).

When the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is the same as the value of the temporary set value stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and when they are different (207SGSa070; Y), The temporary setting value stored in the RAM 102 is stored in the RAM 102 as the setting value (207SGSa071), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa072. That is, in the process of 207SGSa071, the temporary setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual setting value.

Moreover, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the setting value change processing.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device (207SGSa101), the right-handed lamp and the first hold indicator, the second The hold indicator starts blinking (207SGSa102). Further, the CPU 103 starts the lighting of only one of the segments constituting the round indicator as a mode (a mode that is neither big hit A, big hit B nor big hit C) according to the set value confirmation processing (207SGSa103). ).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa107). If the power-off detection process execution start waiting timer is not timed out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107 are repeatedly executed, and if the timer is out (207SGSa107; Y), the power-off detection process is executed. (207SGSa108). The power-off detection process (207SGSa108) is the same as the power-off detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value changing process described above.

After the power-off detection process is executed, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the RAM 102 on the display monitor (207SGSa109), and manages the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of 207SGSa111. When the lock switch is OFF in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the set value on the display monitor is ended (207SGSa112), and all the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device are configured. The segment is turned off (207SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the first hold indicator, and the second hold indicator and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the setting value confirmation processing.

In this way, the lighting of the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device and the round display from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, and the first hold display device, the second hold display device and By starting the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like is that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the process of changing or confirming the set value from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Can be recognized.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, at the start of the set value changing process or the set value confirming process, one of the segments constituting the round indicator is set as a mode corresponding to the set value changing process or the set value confirming process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern of the segments forming the round display can be any of the big hit A, big hit B, and big hit C. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as it is not applicable.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the setting value changing process and the setting value confirming process are started, the segments constituting the round indicator are in the same form as the mode corresponding to the setting value changing process and the setting value confirming process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments that make up the round display can be set at the start of the set value change process and at the start of the set value confirmation process. You may light in different modes.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cleared with the lock switch while the gaming machine frame is open. The setting value changing process is executed by turning on the switch.

At this time, in the display monitor, the display (base value display) using the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display unit is terminated by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. To do. That is, the display monitor according to the present embodiment uses different numbers of display units when the setting value changing process is executed at the time of startup and when the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the setting value changing process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the fourth display unit. Then, when the setting changeover switch is operated while the set value is being displayed on the fourth display unit in this way, the display on the fourth display unit is updated. When the lock switch is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit is set as a new set value.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch is turned on (cleared) while the gaming machine frame is open. By setting the switch to OFF), the set value confirmation processing is executed.

At this time, in the display monitor, the display (base value display) using the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display unit is terminated by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. To do. That is, the display monitor according to the present embodiment uses different numbers of display units when the set value confirmation process is executed at the time of startup and when the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit is ended when the lock switch is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ready to play.

The invention 207SG has been described above by exemplifying the characteristic portion 207SG. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10A) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value); ,
With game control means capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing),
Equipped with
An information display unit (for example, a game information display unit) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device and a second special symbol display device) that is controlled by the game control means and can perform at least variable display. Have
A setting state in which the setting value can be set by the setting means when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the clear switch, the lock switch, and the open sensor are ON at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1) (for example, a setting state). , The state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG.
When in the setting state, the information display unit displays a display that can be recognized as being in the setting state (for example, when the CPU 103 is in the process of changing the setting value, the first special symbol display device and the first special symbol display device). 2 special symbol display device, a portion that lights up all the segments that make up) is described, and according to this feature, variable display that is an important display in the gaming machine is executed. Since the fact that the setting state is set is notified on the display unit, it is possible to perform suitable notification.

Further, the invention 208SG has been described by exemplifying the characteristic portion 207SG. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 208SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10A) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value); ,
With game control means capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing),
Equipped with
An information display unit (for example, a game information display unit) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device and a second special symbol display device) that is controlled by the game control means and can perform at least variable display. Have
A setting state in which the setting value can be set by the setting means when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the clear switch, the lock switch, and the open sensor are ON at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1) (for example, a setting state). , The state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG.
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of specifying that the predetermined error has occurred is displayed in the variable display area (for example, when an error more than a set value occurs, A game machine characterized by flashing all segments composing the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device) is described, and according to this feature, an important display in the game machine In the variable display area where the variable display is executed, the display notifies that a predetermined error has occurred even if the specific condition is satisfied. It can be suitably performed.

Further, the invention 209SG has been described by exemplifying the characteristic portion 207SG. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 209SG,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium and capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10A) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value); ,
With game control means capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing),
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc. The part where prize balls are paid out by doing),
An information display unit (for example, a first display unit to a fourth display unit) capable of displaying predetermined information (for example, a base value) about the game value given by the game value giving unit (for example, a first display unit to a fourth display unit). , Display monitor)
Equipped with
The information display means is capable of displaying setting value information capable of specifying the setting value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. X, the pachinko gaming machine 1 If the lock switch and the open sensor are ON and the clear switch is OFF when activating, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state),
The number of the display units used is different when the predetermined information is displayed and when the setting value information is displayed (for example, when the base value is displayed on the display monitor, the first display unit is displayed). , A second display unit, a third display unit, a fourth display unit is used, and when the set value is displayed on the display monitor, only the fourth display unit is used) According to this feature, since the set value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information regarding the game value, it is not necessary to separately provide a display means for displaying the set value information, and the game is played. Machine cost can be reduced.

The characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and even if there are changes and additions without departing from the scope of the present invention, Included in the invention.

For example, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the embodiment, the game information display unit, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first hold display device, the second hold display device, the normal symbol display device, the general Although the form composed of the figure hold indicator, the round indicator, the right-handed lamp, the probability variation lamp, and the time saving lamp has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game information display section displays the first special symbol. The device and the second special symbol display device may be included without including.

In the characteristic unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process (setting value changing state) and the setting value checking process is being executed (setting value checking state). The 1 special symbol display device and the 2nd special symbol display device have been illustrated as being in the same mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process. With and when the set value confirmation process is being executed, the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device may be lit or blinked in different modes. By doing this, whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state depending on the lighting mode or blinking mode of the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device. Can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, in the set value changing state and the set value confirming state, the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device are turned on to turn on the first special symbol display device. Illustrated a mode in which the display mode (lighting mode) of the symbol display device or the second special symbol display device is different from the display mode when the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device derives and displays the variable display result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the display mode (lighting mode) of the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, the first special symbol If the display device or the second special symbol display device is different from the display mode when the variable display result is derived and displayed, a part of all the segments configuring the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device It is not necessary to turn on the segment.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-mentioned embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, all segments and round indicators constituting the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device are configured. The mode in which the segments are lit, the right-handed lamp, and all the segments composing the first hold indicator and the second hold indicator are blinked has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is changed. In the state and the set value confirmation state, the lighting of one segment that constitutes the round display, the blinking of the right-handed lamp, and the blinking of all the segments that configure the first hold indicator and the second hold indicator are not executed. Or, you may execute only one part.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value changing state and the set value confirming state, only one of the segments constituting the round display is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and if the combination does not correspond to the jackpot type, there may be a plurality of lit segments constituting the round indicator in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the notification of the setting value abnormality error is executed using the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of this, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be individually provided with an LED for error notification, and the LED may be turned on or blinking to notify that the set value error has occurred.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a display monitor for displaying the base value is displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited thereto. 1 may not be provided with a display monitor. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with a display monitor as described above, a display means for displaying a set value (or a provisional set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state may be newly provided.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first hold display device, the second hold display device, the round display device, the right, which constitute the game information display portion. Although the striking lamp and the like are set to be different from those in the game, the pachinko gaming machine 1 notifies the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first holding display device, the second holding display device, the round display device, the right striking lamp, etc., which constitute the game information display unit, are pachinko game machines 1 May be displayed (lighted or blinked) during the game as long as it is possible to inform that the set value is changed or the set value is confirmed.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first hold display device, the second hold display device, the round display device, the right, which constitute the game information display portion. Although the striking lamp and the like are set to be different from those in the game, the pachinko gaming machine 1 notifies the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the “mode different from that during game” may include that the blinking cycle is different, the brightness, the emission color of each segment is different, and the like.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first hold display device, the second hold display device, the round display device, the right, which constitute the game information display portion. Although the form which notifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state by lighting or blinking the striking lamp has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. When 1 is the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first hold indicator, the second hold indicator, the round indicator, the right-handed lamp lighting A description that flashing or blinking is executed may be provided at a predetermined location of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position near the game information display unit). By doing so, the clerk of the game hall who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first hold indicator, the second hold indicator, It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition of lighting or blinking of the round indicator and the right-handed lamp as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control main process of the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the RAM clear process is executed when it is determined that the clear switch is ON or after the setting value changing flag is cleared. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing is performed when it is determined that the clear switch is ON or when the set value changing flag is cleared. It may be executed when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set, not after.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 10F)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, problems may occur from the following viewpoints. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and that can execute control of an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. there were. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, it is possible to shift to the next processing only when all the main processings being executed are completed (for example, JP 2010-200902A). reference). However, in the case of a gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work is preferably executed. I couldn't. The gaming machines according to the invention 10F, the invention 11F, the invention 12F, and the invention 13F which solve such problems are proposed below. In the following, the features of the gaming machines according to Invention 10F, Invention 11F, Invention 12F, and Invention 13F will be referred to as characteristic unit 10F. The characteristic unit 10F is characterized in that a game stop start process and a game stop end process are added to the above-described set value change process and set value confirmation process. The characteristic unit 10F can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above together with the characteristic unit 207SG.

FIG. 11-1 is a flowchart showing the setting value changing process in the characteristic unit 10F. In FIG. 11A, the same processing as that in FIG. The RAM clearing process was executed before the setting change process was executed. Therefore, at the stage of the setting change process, no information about the game remains in the storage area. However, the RAM clear process may be executed when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set. As a result, the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. In the characteristic unit 10F, description will be made on the assumption that the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. In the setting value change processing, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start processing (10FS001). Details of the game stop start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3. After the game stop start process, the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device is started (207SGSa051). Then, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG.

In addition, the CPU 103 executes the game stop ending process after executing the process of clearing the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) (10FS002). Details of the game stop ending process will be described with reference to FIG. 11-4. After the game stop ending process, the display of the set value (or the provisional set value) on the display monitor is ended (207SGSa067). Then, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG.

FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing the setting value confirmation processing in the characteristic unit 10F. In FIG. 11B, the same processes as those in FIG. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3. This game stop start processing is common to the game stop start processing of FIG. 11-1. After the game stop start process, the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device is started (207SGSa101). Then, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 10-2 is executed.

Further, when the lock switch is turned off in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the CPU 103 executes the game stop ending process (10FS002). Details of the game stop ending process will be described with reference to FIG. 11-4. This game stop end process is the same process as the game stop end process of FIG. 11-1. After the game stop ending process, the display of the set value on the display monitor is ended (207SGSa112). Then, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 10-2 is executed.

(About various timers)
Next, the game stop start processing will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers measure time and period relating to the game. When the game is stopped, the CPU 103 stops the counting of these timers. The plurality of timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 having the special winning opening. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from when the special winning opening door is opened to when it is closed. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for measuring the interval period between rounds during the big hit game state. The CPU 103 uses the inter-round interval period timer to measure the time from the end of one round to the start of the next round.

The V-lid opening time timer controls the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished to a certain-variable state based on the passage of a certain switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and the certain switch ( It is a timer for measuring the opening time of the V lid, which is provided in front of a sensor for detecting the V probability change and is controlled to be in an open state and a closed state. In the V-probable variation gaming machine, the V lid is opened in a predetermined round of a plurality of rounds. An area in which the V lid is opened is called a V winning area. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the V lid is opened to when it is closed by the V lid opening time timer. The V passage waiting time timer is a timer for measuring the time of V winning which determines that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103 is a game ball that has passed through a predetermined switch after the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 has changed from the open state to the closed state (the player enters the special winning opening near the closing of the special winning opening door and sets the predetermined prize). A game ball that has passed through the switch is also determined as a V winning within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the valid period of the V winning, in which the V winning is determined to be valid, by the V passage waiting time timer.

The electric-chu open time timer is a timer for measuring the open time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wings, which is the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory), is controlled to be in the open state. .. The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, and the CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state to when it is closed by the electric Chu opening time timer. ..

The special figure variation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation time timer. The universal figure variation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the ordinary symbols. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the end of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal variable time timer.

The fanfare time timer is a timer for measuring a period in which the fanfare effect is executed, which is a period for notifying that the big hit is controlled at the start of the big hit. The fanfare period is a period in which the fanfare production as a production operation for notifying the start of the big hit game state is executed after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect by the fanfare time timer.

The ending time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which the ending effect is executed, which is a period for notifying the end of the big hit when the big hit ends. The ending period is a period in which the big hit ending process is executed, and is a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

The CPU 103 includes a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a general figure fluctuation stop period timer, and the like as timers other than the above timers. The special figure fluctuation stop period timer is a timer for measuring the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed by the special figure fluctuation stop period timer until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. The universal figure fluctuation stop period timer is a timer for measuring the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from when the variable display of the normal symbol is derived and displayed until the next variable display of the normal symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is derived and displayed by the universal figure fluctuation stop period timer until the variable display of the next ordinary symbol is started.

(Game stop start processing)
Next, the game stop start processing in the characteristic unit 10F will be described. FIG. 11-3 is a flowchart showing the game stop start processing in the characteristic unit 10F. First, in the game stop start processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker opening time timer is operating (10FS010). In 10FS010, if the attacker opening time timer is in operation (10FS010; Y), the attacker opening time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the attacker release time timer is not in operation (10FS010; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is in operation (10FS011). In 10FS011, if the inter-round interval period timer is in operation (10FS011; Y), the inter-round interval period timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (10FS011; N), it is determined whether the V-lid opening time timer is operating (10FS012). In 10FS012, if the V lid opening time timer is in operation (10FS012; Y), the V lid opening time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the V lid opening time timer is not in operation (10FS012; N), it is determined whether or not the V passage waiting time timer is in operation (10FS013). In 10FS013, if the V passage waiting time timer is in operation (10FS013; Y), the operating V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is ended.

If the V passage waiting time timer is not in operation (10FS013; N), it is determined whether or not the power-chu open time timer is in operation (10FS014). In 10FS014, if the power-chu open time timer is operating (10FS014; Y), the power-chu open time timer that is operating is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the power switch opening time timer is not operating (10FS014; N), it is determined whether the special figure variation time timer is operating (10FS015). In 10FS015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS015; Y), the special figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the special figure variation time timer is not in operation (10FS015; N), it is determined whether the general figure variation time timer is in operation (10FS016). In 10FS016, if the universal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS016; Y), the universal figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the universal figure variation time timer is not operating (10FS016; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017). In 10FS017, if the fanfare time timer is in operation (10FS017; Y), the fanfare time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not operating (10FS017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is operating (10FS018). In 10FS018, if the ending time timer is in operation (10FS018; Y), the ending time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not in operation (10FS018; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is in operation as another timer (10FS019). In 10FS019, if the other timer is in operation (10FS019; Y), the other timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the other timers are not operating (10FS019; N), the other process (10FS021) is executed, and then the process ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, a process for invalidating the firing of the ball hitting handle 30, a process for invalidating various sensors provided at the starting opening, the general winning opening 10, the out opening, and the passage gate 41, a process for invalidating detection of various errors, The process of invalidating the payout of prize balls is included. By the other process (10FS021), various processes are invalidated and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, the game stop ending process in the characteristic unit 10F will be described. FIG. 11-4 is a flowchart showing a game stop ending process in the characteristic unit 10F. First, in the game stop ending process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030). In 10FS030, if the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the attacker release time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031). In 10FS031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether the V-lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032). In 10FS032, if the V-lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032; Y), the stopped V-lid opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the V lid opening time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). In 10FS033, if the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033; Y), the stopped V passage waiting time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the V passage waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether or not the power cable open time timer is stopped (10FS034). In 10FS034, if the power-chu open time timer is stopped (10FS034; Y), the active power-chu open time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the electric channel open time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether the special figure variation time timer is stopped (10FS035). In 10FS035, if the special figure variation time timer is stopped (10FS035; Y), the stopped special figure variation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the special figure variation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether the universal figure variation time timer is stopped (10FS036). In 10FS036, if the universal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036; Y), the suspended universal figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the universal figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). In 10FS037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). In 10FS038, if the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped as another timer (10FS039). In 10FS039, if the other timers are stopped (10FS039; Y), the stopped other timers are activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the other timers are not stopped (10FS039; N), the other processing (10FS041) is executed, and then the processing ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processing. For example, the process of enabling the firing of the ball hitting handle 30, the process of enabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning opening 10, the out port, and the passage gate 41, the process of enabling the detection of various errors, It includes processing for enabling the payout of prize balls. By the other process (10FS041), various processes are validated and the game is normally executed.

(About the effect of the characteristic part)
As shown in FIG. 11-1 to FIG. 11-4, the CPU 103 controls the attacker opening time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while changing to the open state. Of the attacker opening time timer is restarted based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state in the setting confirmed state is subtracted to advance the game. Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state is Based on the end, the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the interval period between rounds is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. You can

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled during the valid period of V winning, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the valid period of the V winning is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 11-1 to FIG. 11-4, the CPU 103 is based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and the valid period of the power-chu open time timer. And stops the time measurement of the valid period of the power cable open time timer based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the enterable state in the setting confirmed state. It is possible to prevent that.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 measures the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that the special symbol variable display is controlled to the setting confirmation state while being executed. Is stopped, and the measurement of the valid period of the special figure variation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is prevented that the player is disadvantaged because the special symbol variable display is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 11-1 to FIG. 11-4, the CPU 103 measures the effective period of the general-use variable time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the ordinary symbols is executed. And restarts the measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variable time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the variable display of the normal symbols is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the fanfare production is being executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the measurement of the effective period of the fanfare time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fanfare effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. ..

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the ending confirmation is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the ending effect is being executed. Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the counting of the valid period of the ending time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the ending effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. ..

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 is controlled based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and before the next variable display is started. The clocking of the period of the fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and the clocking of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing this, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game proceeds by subtracting the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state. This can prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Regarding a modified example of the gaming machine related to the characteristic unit 10F)
Although the characteristic portion 10F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions without departing from the scope of the present invention. included. Below, the modification of the characteristic part 10F is demonstrated.

The game machine (so-called first-class game machine) that shifts to the big hit game state based on the variable display result of the special pattern and the decorative pattern has been described, but the special variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) provided in the game area A gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot gaming state based on the fact that a game ball has won (V-winning) a special winning port (V winning port) inside, and the first and second types It may be applied to a game machine (one-two-mixer) in which and are combined. When the start winning to the second start winning opening is detected, the big hit determination is executed. When the result of the big hit is determined, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the big hit display result becomes the big hit game. The game control similar to the jackpot based on the start winning to the first start winning opening, such as being controlled to the state, is executed. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit, the small hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is the small hit, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result becomes the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device for small hits is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When the game ball is received by the special variable winning ball device for the small hit in the small hitting game state, and the game ball enters the special winning hole (V area) and is detected by the predetermined switch, the variable for the big hit The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the second-class big hit game control in which the prize winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds and becomes a big hit game state.

In such a one-and-two-mixer, a small hit time timer may be provided for measuring an effective period in which a game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V area) is determined to be effective. The CPU 103 determines that a game ball that has passed a predetermined switch after the special variable winning ball device has passed from the open state to the closed state by the small hit time timer is within the valid period. The CPU 103 uses a small hit time timer to measure a period during which the winning of the special winning opening is effectively determined. Then, the CPU 103 stops measuring the effective period of the small hit time timer based on being controlled to the setting check state when in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state. The counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer may be restarted. By doing this, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and it is possible for the player to be disadvantaged because the control is executed in the small hitting game state in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, various controls are executed in the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the same control may be executed in the setting change state. Good. For example, the CPU 103 stops clocking of various timers based on being controlled to a setting change state when the player is in an advantageous state, etc., and various timers based on the completion of the setting change state. You may make it restart the time measurement of.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbol is the big hit display result or the off display result. Specifically, if the variable display of the special symbol is the big hit display result, stop the timekeeping of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended. If the special display variable time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol is displayed as a result, the special map variable time timer may not be stopped even if the setting confirmation state is controlled. .. In this way, for the big hit display result that is in an advantageous state for the player, the timer is stopped to give a disadvantage to the player, but the timer is stopped because the deviated display result does not cause a disadvantage to the player. You can prevent it from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a big hit display result or a deviant display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, if the setting confirmation is executed during execution of the variable display of the deviation display result, during the execution of the variable display of the deviation display, it is the symbol stop period without stopping the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer. At this time, the special figure fluctuation stop period timer may be stopped.

The timer control may be changed depending on whether the set value is advantageous to the player or not. For example, when the setting confirmation state is set when the setting value is advantageous to the player, various timers are stopped, but when the setting confirmation state is set when the setting value is unfavorable to the player, various timers are set. It may not be stopped.

The invention 10F has been described above by exemplifying the characteristic portion 10F. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 10F,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of the setting values (for example, the setting values 1 to 3) of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to execute)
A state control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation processing);
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous for the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player.
A predetermined game execution means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
And a variable winning timekeeping unit (for example, a CPU 103 which measures an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period for changing the variable winning apparatus to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state has ended. Based on the fact that the CPU 103 restarts the timekeeping of the period (for example, the CPU 103 measures the period of the attacker opening time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while changing to the open state). And restarting the time measurement of the attacker opening time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and in the setting confirmation state, the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

The invention 11F has been described by exemplifying the characteristic portion 10F. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 11F,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of the setting values (for example, the setting values 1 to 3) of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to execute)
A state control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation processing);
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41), the normal identification information (for example, the normal symbol) is variably displayed, and the normal variable display means (for example, the CPU 103) that derives the display result is displayed. ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , A variable winning ball device 6B),
And an ordinary variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 that keeps time with a power-chew opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the ordinary variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning award timing means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines that the valid period of the power-chu open time timer is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is open) Stop the time measurement, and restart the time measurement of the valid period of the electric Chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantageous because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirmation state. Can be prevented.

The invention 12F has been described by exemplifying the characteristic portion 10F. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 12F,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player when a specific display is derived as a result,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of the setting values (for example, the setting values 1 to 3) of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to execute)
A state control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation processing);
And variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the identification information (for example, a special symbol),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting). Resuming the valid period of the special figure variation time timer based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

The invention 13F has been described by exemplifying the characteristic portion 10F. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 13F,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is derived,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of the setting values (for example, the setting values 1 to 3) of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to execute)
A state control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation processing);
A normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) and derives a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41).
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of the variable display of the ordinary identification information (for example, CPU 103 for timing by the universal figure variable time timer),
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being performed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the validity period of the universal figure variable time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable identification information is normally displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 40F)
Next, the characteristic portion 40F will be described. The characteristic unit 40F has a feature regarding the processing of the effect control command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Noise may be generated due to static electricity or the like in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In such a case, the effect control command may be unintentionally transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The processing when such an irregular command is received will be described below.

FIG. 12-1 is a diagram exemplifying an effect control command in the characteristic unit 40F in the present embodiment. The command F1XXH and the command F2XXH are effect control commands indicating the contents of the winning determination results such as the jackpot type determination and the variation pattern type determination at the time of the start winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Of these, the command F1XXH is a symbol designating command that indicates whether or not a big hit is included in the winning judgment results, and the judgment result of the type of the big hit. Further, the command F2XXH is a variation type command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the variation pattern type random number value is in the winning determination result.

Various effect control commands shown in FIG. 12A are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 at predetermined timing by the CPU 103. By receiving various effect control commands, the effect control CPU 120 executes various processes. A part of the various processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 based on the effect control command will be described.

(About processing based on fluctuation pattern designation command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 on the basis of the reception of the variation pattern designation command to perform the variation display of the decorative pattern to be displayed. In addition, the image display device 5 may be provided with a constant small symbol of a reduced decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. In such a case, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, thereby performing the variation display of the constantly displayed small symbols.

(About processing based on the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command)
As a variable display pattern, a decorative symbol, a special symbol, and a fourth symbol may be provided as a fourth symbol following the ordinary symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first and second special symbols) is changing, for example, it is fluctuated by a certain operation in a mode that is always visible in a display device such as the image display device 5. Is displayed. By the variable display of the fourth symbol, an effect such that the effect content including the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears from the screen for a moment is performed, or the movable body covers all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when an effect such as shielding is performed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable display. Based on the reception of the first variation start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to display the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variation start command.

(About processing based on the designated command during the opening of the special winning opening)
During the big hit game, for example, a round game for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state (first state) advantageous to the player is executed 15 times. During the round game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the closed state (second state), which makes it difficult for the gaming ball to win the big winning opening. The effect control CPU 120 controls the special variable winning a prize ball device 7 to the open state based on the reception of the special winning opening opening designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds in the big hit game state by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the special winning opening opening designation command.

(Regarding the processing based on the first start mouth winning designation command and the second start mouth winning designation command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first start opening winning award designation command, so that the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 stores the first hold information. Display the hold display corresponding to. Further, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 on the basis of the reception of the second start opening winning award designation command, so that the effect control command reception buffer stored in the RAM 122 stores the second value. Display the hold display corresponding to the hold information.

(About processing based on symbol designating command, variation type designating command)
Based on the reception of the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command, the effect control CPU 120 performs a winning flash effect and a winning change change effect. The winning flash effect is an effect of causing a lamp provided around the first starting opening to emit light when a start winning occurs. The effect control CPU 120 performs the lottery for the winning flash effect based on the jackpot expectation based on the hold information by the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command. When the lottery is won, the lamp emits light in a different manner depending on the degree of expectation. Concretely, the production control CPU 120 emits red light for those with a high expectation of big hits, and white light for those with a low expectation of hits. Is controlled so that the lamp does not emit light. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound according to the degree of expectation together with the winning flash effect. In addition, you may control not to output a sound only by light emission.

The winning-time hold change effect is an effect for changing the display mode of the hold display displayed when the start winning occurs to a mode different from the normal mode. The effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery for winning change hold effect based on the jackpot expectation based on the hold information by the symbol designating command or the variation type designating command. When the lottery is won, the hold display at the time of winning is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. Specifically, the hold display is displayed in red, green, and blue in order from the one with the highest jackpot expectation, and the hold display is displayed in white as a normal mode in the case of being out of the lottery or out of change without reach. .. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the degree of expectation together with the winning pending change effect. In addition, you may control not to output a sound only by a hold change.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the winning flash effect by controlling the light emission of the lamp based on the reception of the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command, thereby executing the winning-time pending change rendering. It should be noted that only one of the winning flash effect and the winning pending change effect may be executed. Further, at the time of winning the prize, the effect indicating the degree of expectation may be executed only by outputting the sound.

Next, the effect control main process executed in the characteristic unit 40F will be described. FIG. 12-2 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process in the characteristic unit 40F.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command has been received (207SGS411). When the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value changing state or the setting value checking state, the setting value is changed. A set value related informing process is executed to inform that the operation is in progress (informing that the set value is being changed) or that the setting value is being confirmed (informing that the set value is being confirmed) (207SGS412). In the set value related notification process, a notification image indicating that the setting variable is being updated and a notification image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed.

After the setting value related notification process is executed in 207SGS412, the sub game stop process is executed (40FS001). In the sub-side game stop processing, when the production control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the production control CPU 120 stops the game. The process is executed. Details of the sub-side game stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 12-3.

After the sub-side game stop processing is executed in 40FS001, it is determined whether or not the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). When the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are received (207SGS416; Y). Proceeds to 207 SGS427.

FIG. 12-3 is a flowchart showing a sub-side game stop process in the characteristic unit 40F executed in 40FS001. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122. Then, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer.

In the sub-side game stop processing, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first variation start command has been received (40FS010). When it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS011. When it is determined that the first variation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The production control CPU 120 discards the first variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby causing the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS011, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the second variation start command has been received. When it is determined that the second variation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS012. When it is determined that the second variation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The production control CPU 120 discards the second variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby displaying the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS012, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS013. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby performing the variation display of the decorative pattern by operating the image display device 5 and the variation display of the constantly small symbols. Can be prevented from running. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS013, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the special winning opening open designation command has been received. If it is determined that the command for opening special winning opening is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS014. When it is determined that the special winning opening open command is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The CPU 120 for effect control updates the display of the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the special winning opening opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. You can turn it off. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS014, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first start winning opening designation command has been received. When it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS015. When it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 does not display the hold display of the first hold information by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the first start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. can do. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS015, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the second start winning opening designation command is received. When it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The production control CPU 120 discards the second start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so that the hold display of the second hold information by operating the image display device 5 is not displayed. can do. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS016, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not a symbol designating command has been received. If it is determined that the symbol designating command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the symbol designating command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can cancel the winning flash effect under the control of causing the lamp to emit light by discarding the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can prevent the winning-change-on-hold change effect by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the symbol designating command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. .. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS017, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the variation type designation command is received. If it is determined that the variation type designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS018. When it is determined that the fluctuation type designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can avoid executing the winning flash effect under the control of causing the lamp to emit light by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may not execute the winning-pending change effect by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. it can. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS018, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not a test command has been received. Here, the test command is a command directly transmitted to the production control board 12 from a device for sending a command for confirming the state of the screen and the state of the accessory provided at the time of factory shipment. .. When transmitting the test command, various test commands are transmitted in a state in which a transmission device dedicated to transmitting the test command is connected to the effect control board 12.

If it is determined in 40FS018 that the test command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS019. When it is determined that the test command is received, the control according to the test command is executed even in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state (40FS020). For example, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to perform a predetermined operation based on the reception of a test command for checking the liquid crystal of the image display device 5 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Display the check screen. In this way, the processing based on the reception of the test command is executed even in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS019, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not a command other than the setting change end notification command or the setting confirmation end notification command has been received (40FS019). These commands are, for example, the commands shown in FIG. 12-1. If it is determined that these commands have not been received, the processing ends. When it is determined that these commands have been received, the received commands are discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from performing an effect by discarding these commands during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Then, the process ends.

(About the effect of the characteristic part)
As shown in FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even if the variation pattern designation command is received while being controlled to the setting change state. Do not perform control based on reception. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even if the variation pattern designation command is received while being controlled in the setting confirmation state. Do not perform control based on reception. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state, even if the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are received, the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are received. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting confirmation state, even if the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received, the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening opening specifying command even if the special winning opening opening specifying command is received while being controlled to the setting change state. The control based on the reception of the command for opening the special winning opening is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening opening specifying command even if the special winning opening opening specifying command is received while being controlled to the setting confirmation state. The control based on the reception of the special winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state, even if the first start winning a prize port designation command and the second starting winning a prize port designation command are received, the first starting prize award. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first starting winning opening designation command and the second starting winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting confirmation state, even if the first start winning a prize opening designation command and the second starting winning a prize opening designation command are received, the first starting award winning prize. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first starting winning opening designation command and the second starting winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designating command and the variation type command while being controlled to the setting change state, and therefore, is based on the receipt of the symbol designating command and the variation type command. Do not execute control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designating command and the variation type command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state, and therefore, is based on the receipt of the symbol designating command and the variation type command. Do not execute control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command from the CPU 103, but thereafter discards the received command as in 40FS021. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Further, since the received command is discarded and no information remains, even if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state ends, no erroneous command remains and no malfunction is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-2, based on the reception of the setting value change start notification command, the setting for displaying the image notifying that the setting is being changed is received, and the setting value confirmation start notification command is received. Based on the above, the setting for displaying the image notifying that the setting confirmation state is set is made. By doing so, it is possible to indicate that the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and even if the irregular display command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the image display device 5 or the like. It is possible to prevent the predetermined rendering means from malfunctioning.

As indicated by 40FS020 in FIG. 12C, the control according to the test command is executed even when the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. With this configuration, even when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, it is possible to execute the operation of the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 based on the test command.

(Regarding the modified example of the characteristic part)
The characteristic portion 40F has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions without departing from the scope of the present invention. included. Below, the modification of the characteristic part 40F is demonstrated.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the analysis of the effect control command receiving buffer for each command transmitted while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, instead of sequentially analyzing the commands and discarding them one by one, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, the CPU 103 may send an initialization command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 based on the end of the setting change state. Then, based on the reception of the initialization command, all the commands stored in the effect control command reception buffer may be discarded. Further, even in the setting confirmation state, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded based on the reception of the predetermined command.

In the embodiment described above, when the control based on the effect control command is not executed even when the effect control command other than the command related to the setting change or the setting check is received while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. explained. However, the processing based on the reception of the effect control command while the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be internally executed. Even in such a case, the control executed when being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state has a higher priority than the control based on the reception of the other effect control command. On the screen of the image display device 5, an image according to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is visually displayed. Regarding the sound, during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, channels other than the channel outputting the notification sound during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be muted.

In the above-described embodiment, the process of analyzing the command received when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled is executed. However, when the command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the analysis may not be performed even if the command is received.

In the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 and the lamp at the time of winning the prize have been described as the predetermined effect means operated by the effect control CPU 120 when the effect control command is received. However, the predetermined effect means may be any one as long as the effect control means 120 is executed based on the reception of the command. For example, the operation means operated by the player or a movable member provided in the game machine may be used as the predetermined effect means. In such a case, when the operation means vibrates or the movable member operates due to the reception of a predetermined command, commands for executing these operations are received during the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. Even if it is done, the control for discarding the command may be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, a command other than the command for ending the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, such as the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command, is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. You may control not to do it.

In the above-described embodiment, a lamp provided in the gaming machine may be caused to emit light or sound may be output from a speaker together with the control for operating the image display device 5. In such a case, the command may be discarded when a command related to the lamp or the speaker is received so that the effect means does not operate during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

In the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the notice production based on the reception of the symbol designating command or the variation type command is executed. However, the notice effect to be executed may be executed by receiving one of the commands, and when the command related to the variation pattern command is transmitted due to the occurrence of the start winning, the command related to the variation pattern is executed. You may make it perform a notice production based on. In such a case, even if a command related to the variation pattern is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the command may be discarded.

In the above-described embodiment, the advance notice lottery to be executed may be executed based on the symbol designating command or the variation type command being received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Then, various types of advance notice may not be executed by determining that the advance notice is not executable at the timing of determining whether or not the advance notice is actually executable. Also, when executing the pre-reading notice effect in continuous variable display other than when winning, the notice lottery is executed based on receipt of the symbol designating command or variation type command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is finished at the timing of actually starting the advance notice, the advance notice may be executed based on the received command.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the command received in the processing of 40FS021 in 40FS001 is discarded has been described. However, the timing of discarding the received command may be the timing after it is determined that the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; Y). By doing this, when a plurality of irregular commands are received, the commands can be discarded at once.

In the above-described embodiment, when an irregular command is received once during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, a restriction may be applied so that another irregular command is not received thereafter. Good.

(Explanation regarding the association of the characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic part may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic part. The feature parts combined in this way or the individual feature parts that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the respective configurations relating to the other feature parts.

The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General prize hole 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary pattern display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start opening Switch 23... Count switch 30... Ball hitting handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 100... Game control microcomputers 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
State control means capable of controlling a first special state different from the advantageous state and a second special state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state,
In the second special state, when the advantageous state is controlled, the notice effect executing means that executes a notice effect that gives notice that the advantageous state control will be performed in the second special state,
And a suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect suggesting that the first special state is controlled,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at a high rate after the notice effect is finished,
further,
As the advantageous state, it is possible to control to at least one of a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
End effect selecting means for selecting a longer period as the end effect period at the end of the advantageous condition at a higher rate in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state,
And a finish production execution means capable of executing a finish production in the finish production period,
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing any one of a plurality of kinds of end time effects during the end time effect period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect execution means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Further comprising reception means,
A gaming machine characterized by that. In a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
State control means capable of controlling a first special state different from the advantageous state and a second special state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state,
In the second special state, when the advantageous state is controlled, the notice effect executing means that executes a notice effect that gives notice that the advantageous state control will be performed in the second special state,
And a suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect suggesting that the first special state is controlled,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at a high rate after the notice effect is finished,
further,
A normal state, a special state including the first special state and the second special state, a first advantageous state as the advantageous state, and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Controllable to at least one,
Compared to the case of controlling to the advantageous state when controlled to the normal state, the case of controlling to the advantageous state when controlled to the special state is at the end of the advantageous state. End effect selecting means for selecting a long period at a high rate as the end effect period,
And a finish production execution means capable of executing a finish production in the finish production period,
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing any one of a plurality of kinds of end time effects during the end time effect period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect execution means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Further comprising reception means,
A gaming machine characterized by that. In a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
State control means capable of controlling a first special state different from the advantageous state and a second special state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state,
In the second special state, when the advantageous state is controlled, the notice effect executing means that executes a notice effect that gives notice that the advantageous state control will be performed in the second special state,
And a suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect suggesting that the first special state is controlled,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at a high rate after the notice effect is finished,
further,
As the advantageous state, it is possible to control to at least one of a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
As the special identification information, it is possible to execute variable display of the first special identification information and the second special identification information which is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information,
First reserved storage means capable of storing information regarding variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information;
Second reserved storage means capable of storing information on the variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information;
When the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are both stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means to be executed with priority over display,
The advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information, rather than when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. End production selection means for selecting a long period at a high rate as the end production period at the end of,
And a finish production execution means capable of executing a finish production in the finish production period,
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing any one of a plurality of kinds of end time effects during the end time effect period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect execution means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Further comprising reception means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.